literature review and theoretical review

Purdue Online Writing Lab Purdue OWL® College of Liberal Arts

Writing a Literature Review

Welcome to the Purdue OWL

This page is brought to you by the OWL at Purdue University. When printing this page, you must include the entire legal notice.

Copyright ©1995-2018 by The Writing Lab & The OWL at Purdue and Purdue University. All rights reserved. This material may not be published, reproduced, broadcast, rewritten, or redistributed without permission. Use of this site constitutes acceptance of our terms and conditions of fair use.

A literature review is a document or section of a document that collects key sources on a topic and discusses those sources in conversation with each other (also called synthesis ). The lit review is an important genre in many disciplines, not just literature (i.e., the study of works of literature such as novels and plays). When we say “literature review” or refer to “the literature,” we are talking about the research ( scholarship ) in a given field. You will often see the terms “the research,” “the scholarship,” and “the literature” used mostly interchangeably.

Where, when, and why would I write a lit review?

There are a number of different situations where you might write a literature review, each with slightly different expectations; different disciplines, too, have field-specific expectations for what a literature review is and does. For instance, in the humanities, authors might include more overt argumentation and interpretation of source material in their literature reviews, whereas in the sciences, authors are more likely to report study designs and results in their literature reviews; these differences reflect these disciplines’ purposes and conventions in scholarship. You should always look at examples from your own discipline and talk to professors or mentors in your field to be sure you understand your discipline’s conventions, for literature reviews as well as for any other genre.

A literature review can be a part of a research paper or scholarly article, usually falling after the introduction and before the research methods sections. In these cases, the lit review just needs to cover scholarship that is important to the issue you are writing about; sometimes it will also cover key sources that informed your research methodology.

Lit reviews can also be standalone pieces, either as assignments in a class or as publications. In a class, a lit review may be assigned to help students familiarize themselves with a topic and with scholarship in their field, get an idea of the other researchers working on the topic they’re interested in, find gaps in existing research in order to propose new projects, and/or develop a theoretical framework and methodology for later research. As a publication, a lit review usually is meant to help make other scholars’ lives easier by collecting and summarizing, synthesizing, and analyzing existing research on a topic. This can be especially helpful for students or scholars getting into a new research area, or for directing an entire community of scholars toward questions that have not yet been answered.

What are the parts of a lit review?

Most lit reviews use a basic introduction-body-conclusion structure; if your lit review is part of a larger paper, the introduction and conclusion pieces may be just a few sentences while you focus most of your attention on the body. If your lit review is a standalone piece, the introduction and conclusion take up more space and give you a place to discuss your goals, research methods, and conclusions separately from where you discuss the literature itself.

Introduction:

• An introductory paragraph that explains what your working topic and thesis is
• A forecast of key topics or texts that will appear in the review
• Potentially, a description of how you found sources and how you analyzed them for inclusion and discussion in the review (more often found in published, standalone literature reviews than in lit review sections in an article or research paper)
• Summarize and synthesize: Give an overview of the main points of each source and combine them into a coherent whole
• Analyze and interpret: Don’t just paraphrase other researchers – add your own interpretations where possible, discussing the significance of findings in relation to the literature as a whole
• Critically Evaluate: Mention the strengths and weaknesses of your sources
• Write in well-structured paragraphs: Use transition words and topic sentence to draw connections, comparisons, and contrasts.

Conclusion:

• Summarize the key findings you have taken from the literature and emphasize their significance
• Connect it back to your primary research question

How should I organize my lit review?

Lit reviews can take many different organizational patterns depending on what you are trying to accomplish with the review. Here are some examples:

• Chronological : The simplest approach is to trace the development of the topic over time, which helps familiarize the audience with the topic (for instance if you are introducing something that is not commonly known in your field). If you choose this strategy, be careful to avoid simply listing and summarizing sources in order. Try to analyze the patterns, turning points, and key debates that have shaped the direction of the field. Give your interpretation of how and why certain developments occurred (as mentioned previously, this may not be appropriate in your discipline — check with a teacher or mentor if you’re unsure).
• Thematic : If you have found some recurring central themes that you will continue working with throughout your piece, you can organize your literature review into subsections that address different aspects of the topic. For example, if you are reviewing literature about women and religion, key themes can include the role of women in churches and the religious attitude towards women.
• Qualitative versus quantitative research
• Empirical versus theoretical scholarship
• Divide the research by sociological, historical, or cultural sources
• Theoretical : In many humanities articles, the literature review is the foundation for the theoretical framework. You can use it to discuss various theories, models, and definitions of key concepts. You can argue for the relevance of a specific theoretical approach or combine various theorical concepts to create a framework for your research.

What are some strategies or tips I can use while writing my lit review?

Any lit review is only as good as the research it discusses; make sure your sources are well-chosen and your research is thorough. Don’t be afraid to do more research if you discover a new thread as you’re writing. More info on the research process is available in our "Conducting Research" resources .

As you’re doing your research, create an annotated bibliography ( see our page on the this type of document ). Much of the information used in an annotated bibliography can be used also in a literature review, so you’ll be not only partially drafting your lit review as you research, but also developing your sense of the larger conversation going on among scholars, professionals, and any other stakeholders in your topic.

Usually you will need to synthesize research rather than just summarizing it. This means drawing connections between sources to create a picture of the scholarly conversation on a topic over time. Many student writers struggle to synthesize because they feel they don’t have anything to add to the scholars they are citing; here are some strategies to help you:

• It often helps to remember that the point of these kinds of syntheses is to show your readers how you understand your research, to help them read the rest of your paper.
• Writing teachers often say synthesis is like hosting a dinner party: imagine all your sources are together in a room, discussing your topic. What are they saying to each other?
• Look at the in-text citations in each paragraph. Are you citing just one source for each paragraph? This usually indicates summary only. When you have multiple sources cited in a paragraph, you are more likely to be synthesizing them (not always, but often
• Read more about synthesis here.

The most interesting literature reviews are often written as arguments (again, as mentioned at the beginning of the page, this is discipline-specific and doesn’t work for all situations). Often, the literature review is where you can establish your research as filling a particular gap or as relevant in a particular way. You have some chance to do this in your introduction in an article, but the literature review section gives a more extended opportunity to establish the conversation in the way you would like your readers to see it. You can choose the intellectual lineage you would like to be part of and whose definitions matter most to your thinking (mostly humanities-specific, but this goes for sciences as well). In addressing these points, you argue for your place in the conversation, which tends to make the lit review more compelling than a simple reporting of other sources.

Have a language expert improve your writing

Run a free plagiarism check in 10 minutes, automatically generate references for free.

• Knowledge Base
• Dissertation
• What is a Literature Review? | Guide, Template, & Examples

What is a Literature Review? | Guide, Template, & Examples

Published on 22 February 2022 by Shona McCombes . Revised on 7 June 2022.

What is a literature review? A literature review is a survey of scholarly sources on a specific topic. It provides an overview of current knowledge, allowing you to identify relevant theories, methods, and gaps in the existing research.

There are five key steps to writing a literature review:

• Search for relevant literature
• Evaluate sources
• Identify themes, debates and gaps
• Outline the structure
• Write your literature review

A good literature review doesn’t just summarise sources – it analyses, synthesises, and critically evaluates to give a clear picture of the state of knowledge on the subject.

Instantly correct all language mistakes in your text

Be assured that you'll submit flawless writing. Upload your document to correct all your mistakes.

Table of contents

Why write a literature review, examples of literature reviews, step 1: search for relevant literature, step 2: evaluate and select sources, step 3: identify themes, debates and gaps, step 4: outline your literature review’s structure, step 5: write your literature review, frequently asked questions about literature reviews, introduction.

• Quick Run-through
• Step 1 & 2

When you write a dissertation or thesis, you will have to conduct a literature review to situate your research within existing knowledge. The literature review gives you a chance to:

• Demonstrate your familiarity with the topic and scholarly context
• Develop a theoretical framework and methodology for your research
• Position yourself in relation to other researchers and theorists
• Show how your dissertation addresses a gap or contributes to a debate

You might also have to write a literature review as a stand-alone assignment. In this case, the purpose is to evaluate the current state of research and demonstrate your knowledge of scholarly debates around a topic.

The content will look slightly different in each case, but the process of conducting a literature review follows the same steps. We’ve written a step-by-step guide that you can follow below.

The only proofreading tool specialized in correcting academic writing

The academic proofreading tool has been trained on 1000s of academic texts and by native English editors. Making it the most accurate and reliable proofreading tool for students.

Correct my document today

Writing literature reviews can be quite challenging! A good starting point could be to look at some examples, depending on what kind of literature review you’d like to write.

• Example literature review #1: “Why Do People Migrate? A Review of the Theoretical Literature” ( Theoretical literature review about the development of economic migration theory from the 1950s to today.)
• Example literature review #2: “Literature review as a research methodology: An overview and guidelines” ( Methodological literature review about interdisciplinary knowledge acquisition and production.)
• Example literature review #3: “The Use of Technology in English Language Learning: A Literature Review” ( Thematic literature review about the effects of technology on language acquisition.)
• Example literature review #4: “Learners’ Listening Comprehension Difficulties in English Language Learning: A Literature Review” ( Chronological literature review about how the concept of listening skills has changed over time.)

You can also check out our templates with literature review examples and sample outlines at the links below.

Download Word doc Download Google doc

Before you begin searching for literature, you need a clearly defined topic .

If you are writing the literature review section of a dissertation or research paper, you will search for literature related to your research objectives and questions .

If you are writing a literature review as a stand-alone assignment, you will have to choose a focus and develop a central question to direct your search. Unlike a dissertation research question, this question has to be answerable without collecting original data. You should be able to answer it based only on a review of existing publications.

Make a list of keywords

Start by creating a list of keywords related to your research topic. Include each of the key concepts or variables you’re interested in, and list any synonyms and related terms. You can add to this list if you discover new keywords in the process of your literature search.

• Social media, Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, Snapchat, TikTok
• Body image, self-perception, self-esteem, mental health
• Generation Z, teenagers, adolescents, youth

Search for relevant sources

Use your keywords to begin searching for sources. Some databases to search for journals and articles include:

• Your university’s library catalogue
• Google Scholar
• Project Muse (humanities and social sciences)
• Medline (life sciences and biomedicine)
• EconLit (economics)
• Inspec (physics, engineering and computer science)

You can use boolean operators to help narrow down your search:

Read the abstract to find out whether an article is relevant to your question. When you find a useful book or article, you can check the bibliography to find other relevant sources.

To identify the most important publications on your topic, take note of recurring citations. If the same authors, books or articles keep appearing in your reading, make sure to seek them out.

You probably won’t be able to read absolutely everything that has been written on the topic – you’ll have to evaluate which sources are most relevant to your questions.

For each publication, ask yourself:

• What question or problem is the author addressing?
• What are the key concepts and how are they defined?
• What are the key theories, models and methods? Does the research use established frameworks or take an innovative approach?
• What are the results and conclusions of the study?
• How does the publication relate to other literature in the field? Does it confirm, add to, or challenge established knowledge?
• How does the publication contribute to your understanding of the topic? What are its key insights and arguments?
• What are the strengths and weaknesses of the research?

Make sure the sources you use are credible, and make sure you read any landmark studies and major theories in your field of research.

You can find out how many times an article has been cited on Google Scholar – a high citation count means the article has been influential in the field, and should certainly be included in your literature review.

The scope of your review will depend on your topic and discipline: in the sciences you usually only review recent literature, but in the humanities you might take a long historical perspective (for example, to trace how a concept has changed in meaning over time).

Remember that you can use our template to summarise and evaluate sources you’re thinking about using!

Take notes and cite your sources

As you read, you should also begin the writing process. Take notes that you can later incorporate into the text of your literature review.

It’s important to keep track of your sources with references to avoid plagiarism . It can be helpful to make an annotated bibliography, where you compile full reference information and write a paragraph of summary and analysis for each source. This helps you remember what you read and saves time later in the process.

You can use our free APA Reference Generator for quick, correct, consistent citations.

To begin organising your literature review’s argument and structure, you need to understand the connections and relationships between the sources you’ve read. Based on your reading and notes, you can look for:

• Trends and patterns (in theory, method or results): do certain approaches become more or less popular over time?
• Themes: what questions or concepts recur across the literature?
• Debates, conflicts and contradictions: where do sources disagree?
• Pivotal publications: are there any influential theories or studies that changed the direction of the field?
• Gaps: what is missing from the literature? Are there weaknesses that need to be addressed?

This step will help you work out the structure of your literature review and (if applicable) show how your own research will contribute to existing knowledge.

• Most research has focused on young women.
• There is an increasing interest in the visual aspects of social media.
• But there is still a lack of robust research on highly-visual platforms like Instagram and Snapchat – this is a gap that you could address in your own research.

There are various approaches to organising the body of a literature review. You should have a rough idea of your strategy before you start writing.

Depending on the length of your literature review, you can combine several of these strategies (for example, your overall structure might be thematic, but each theme is discussed chronologically).

Chronological

The simplest approach is to trace the development of the topic over time. However, if you choose this strategy, be careful to avoid simply listing and summarising sources in order.

Try to analyse patterns, turning points and key debates that have shaped the direction of the field. Give your interpretation of how and why certain developments occurred.

If you have found some recurring central themes, you can organise your literature review into subsections that address different aspects of the topic.

For example, if you are reviewing literature about inequalities in migrant health outcomes, key themes might include healthcare policy, language barriers, cultural attitudes, legal status, and economic access.

Methodological

If you draw your sources from different disciplines or fields that use a variety of research methods , you might want to compare the results and conclusions that emerge from different approaches. For example:

• Look at what results have emerged in qualitative versus quantitative research
• Discuss how the topic has been approached by empirical versus theoretical scholarship
• Divide the literature into sociological, historical, and cultural sources

Theoretical

A literature review is often the foundation for a theoretical framework . You can use it to discuss various theories, models, and definitions of key concepts.

You might argue for the relevance of a specific theoretical approach, or combine various theoretical concepts to create a framework for your research.

Like any other academic text, your literature review should have an introduction , a main body, and a conclusion . What you include in each depends on the objective of your literature review.

The introduction should clearly establish the focus and purpose of the literature review.

If you are writing the literature review as part of your dissertation or thesis, reiterate your central problem or research question and give a brief summary of the scholarly context. You can emphasise the timeliness of the topic (“many recent studies have focused on the problem of x”) or highlight a gap in the literature (“while there has been much research on x, few researchers have taken y into consideration”).

Depending on the length of your literature review, you might want to divide the body into subsections. You can use a subheading for each theme, time period, or methodological approach.

As you write, make sure to follow these tips:

• Summarise and synthesise: give an overview of the main points of each source and combine them into a coherent whole.
• Analyse and interpret: don’t just paraphrase other researchers – add your own interpretations, discussing the significance of findings in relation to the literature as a whole.
• Critically evaluate: mention the strengths and weaknesses of your sources.
• Write in well-structured paragraphs: use transitions and topic sentences to draw connections, comparisons and contrasts.

In the conclusion, you should summarise the key findings you have taken from the literature and emphasise their significance.

If the literature review is part of your dissertation or thesis, reiterate how your research addresses gaps and contributes new knowledge, or discuss how you have drawn on existing theories and methods to build a framework for your research. This can lead directly into your methodology section.

A literature review is a survey of scholarly sources (such as books, journal articles, and theses) related to a specific topic or research question .

It is often written as part of a dissertation , thesis, research paper , or proposal .

There are several reasons to conduct a literature review at the beginning of a research project:

• To familiarise yourself with the current state of knowledge on your topic
• To ensure that you’re not just repeating what others have already done
• To identify gaps in knowledge and unresolved problems that your research can address
• To develop your theoretical framework and methodology
• To provide an overview of the key findings and debates on the topic

Writing the literature review shows your reader how your work relates to existing research and what new insights it will contribute.

The literature review usually comes near the beginning of your  dissertation . After the introduction , it grounds your research in a scholarly field and leads directly to your theoretical framework or methodology .

Cite this Scribbr article

If you want to cite this source, you can copy and paste the citation or click the ‘Cite this Scribbr article’ button to automatically add the citation to our free Reference Generator.

McCombes, S. (2022, June 07). What is a Literature Review? | Guide, Template, & Examples. Scribbr. Retrieved 14 May 2024, from https://www.scribbr.co.uk/thesis-dissertation/literature-review/

Is this article helpful?

Shona McCombes

Other students also liked, how to write a dissertation proposal | a step-by-step guide, what is a theoretical framework | a step-by-step guide, what is a research methodology | steps & tips.

• USC Libraries
• Research Guides

Organizing Your Social Sciences Research Paper

• 5. The Literature Review
• Purpose of Guide
• Design Flaws to Avoid
• Independent and Dependent Variables
• Glossary of Research Terms
• Reading Research Effectively
• Narrowing a Topic Idea
• Broadening a Topic Idea
• Extending the Timeliness of a Topic Idea
• Academic Writing Style
• Applying Critical Thinking
• Choosing a Title
• Making an Outline
• Paragraph Development
• Research Process Video Series
• Executive Summary
• The C.A.R.S. Model
• Background Information
• The Research Problem/Question
• Theoretical Framework
• Citation Tracking
• Content Alert Services
• Evaluating Sources
• Primary Sources
• Secondary Sources
• Tiertiary Sources
• Scholarly vs. Popular Publications
• Qualitative Methods
• Quantitative Methods
• Insiderness
• Using Non-Textual Elements
• Limitations of the Study
• Common Grammar Mistakes
• Writing Concisely
• Avoiding Plagiarism
• Footnotes or Endnotes?
• Further Readings
• Generative AI and Writing
• USC Libraries Tutorials and Other Guides
• Bibliography

A literature review surveys prior research published in books, scholarly articles, and any other sources relevant to a particular issue, area of research, or theory, and by so doing, provides a description, summary, and critical evaluation of these works in relation to the research problem being investigated. Literature reviews are designed to provide an overview of sources you have used in researching a particular topic and to demonstrate to your readers how your research fits within existing scholarship about the topic.

Fink, Arlene. Conducting Research Literature Reviews: From the Internet to Paper . Fourth edition. Thousand Oaks, CA: SAGE, 2014.

Importance of a Good Literature Review

A literature review may consist of simply a summary of key sources, but in the social sciences, a literature review usually has an organizational pattern and combines both summary and synthesis, often within specific conceptual categories . A summary is a recap of the important information of the source, but a synthesis is a re-organization, or a reshuffling, of that information in a way that informs how you are planning to investigate a research problem. The analytical features of a literature review might:

• Give a new interpretation of old material or combine new with old interpretations,
• Trace the intellectual progression of the field, including major debates,
• Depending on the situation, evaluate the sources and advise the reader on the most pertinent or relevant research, or
• Usually in the conclusion of a literature review, identify where gaps exist in how a problem has been researched to date.

Given this, the purpose of a literature review is to:

• Place each work in the context of its contribution to understanding the research problem being studied.
• Describe the relationship of each work to the others under consideration.
• Identify new ways to interpret prior research.
• Reveal any gaps that exist in the literature.
• Resolve conflicts amongst seemingly contradictory previous studies.
• Identify areas of prior scholarship to prevent duplication of effort.
• Point the way in fulfilling a need for additional research.
• Locate your own research within the context of existing literature [very important].

Fink, Arlene. Conducting Research Literature Reviews: From the Internet to Paper. 2nd ed. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 2005; Hart, Chris. Doing a Literature Review: Releasing the Social Science Research Imagination . Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1998; Jesson, Jill. Doing Your Literature Review: Traditional and Systematic Techniques . Los Angeles, CA: SAGE, 2011; Knopf, Jeffrey W. "Doing a Literature Review." PS: Political Science and Politics 39 (January 2006): 127-132; Ridley, Diana. The Literature Review: A Step-by-Step Guide for Students . 2nd ed. Los Angeles, CA: SAGE, 2012.

Types of Literature Reviews

It is important to think of knowledge in a given field as consisting of three layers. First, there are the primary studies that researchers conduct and publish. Second are the reviews of those studies that summarize and offer new interpretations built from and often extending beyond the primary studies. Third, there are the perceptions, conclusions, opinion, and interpretations that are shared informally among scholars that become part of the body of epistemological traditions within the field.

In composing a literature review, it is important to note that it is often this third layer of knowledge that is cited as "true" even though it often has only a loose relationship to the primary studies and secondary literature reviews. Given this, while literature reviews are designed to provide an overview and synthesis of pertinent sources you have explored, there are a number of approaches you could adopt depending upon the type of analysis underpinning your study.

Argumentative Review This form examines literature selectively in order to support or refute an argument, deeply embedded assumption, or philosophical problem already established in the literature. The purpose is to develop a body of literature that establishes a contrarian viewpoint. Given the value-laden nature of some social science research [e.g., educational reform; immigration control], argumentative approaches to analyzing the literature can be a legitimate and important form of discourse. However, note that they can also introduce problems of bias when they are used to make summary claims of the sort found in systematic reviews [see below].

Integrative Review Considered a form of research that reviews, critiques, and synthesizes representative literature on a topic in an integrated way such that new frameworks and perspectives on the topic are generated. The body of literature includes all studies that address related or identical hypotheses or research problems. A well-done integrative review meets the same standards as primary research in regard to clarity, rigor, and replication. This is the most common form of review in the social sciences.

Historical Review Few things rest in isolation from historical precedent. Historical literature reviews focus on examining research throughout a period of time, often starting with the first time an issue, concept, theory, phenomena emerged in the literature, then tracing its evolution within the scholarship of a discipline. The purpose is to place research in a historical context to show familiarity with state-of-the-art developments and to identify the likely directions for future research.

Methodological Review A review does not always focus on what someone said [findings], but how they came about saying what they say [method of analysis]. Reviewing methods of analysis provides a framework of understanding at different levels [i.e. those of theory, substantive fields, research approaches, and data collection and analysis techniques], how researchers draw upon a wide variety of knowledge ranging from the conceptual level to practical documents for use in fieldwork in the areas of ontological and epistemological consideration, quantitative and qualitative integration, sampling, interviewing, data collection, and data analysis. This approach helps highlight ethical issues which you should be aware of and consider as you go through your own study.

Systematic Review This form consists of an overview of existing evidence pertinent to a clearly formulated research question, which uses pre-specified and standardized methods to identify and critically appraise relevant research, and to collect, report, and analyze data from the studies that are included in the review. The goal is to deliberately document, critically evaluate, and summarize scientifically all of the research about a clearly defined research problem . Typically it focuses on a very specific empirical question, often posed in a cause-and-effect form, such as "To what extent does A contribute to B?" This type of literature review is primarily applied to examining prior research studies in clinical medicine and allied health fields, but it is increasingly being used in the social sciences.

Theoretical Review The purpose of this form is to examine the corpus of theory that has accumulated in regard to an issue, concept, theory, phenomena. The theoretical literature review helps to establish what theories already exist, the relationships between them, to what degree the existing theories have been investigated, and to develop new hypotheses to be tested. Often this form is used to help establish a lack of appropriate theories or reveal that current theories are inadequate for explaining new or emerging research problems. The unit of analysis can focus on a theoretical concept or a whole theory or framework.

NOTE : Most often the literature review will incorporate some combination of types. For example, a review that examines literature supporting or refuting an argument, assumption, or philosophical problem related to the research problem will also need to include writing supported by sources that establish the history of these arguments in the literature.

Baumeister, Roy F. and Mark R. Leary. "Writing Narrative Literature Reviews."  Review of General Psychology 1 (September 1997): 311-320; Mark R. Fink, Arlene. Conducting Research Literature Reviews: From the Internet to Paper . 2nd ed. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 2005; Hart, Chris. Doing a Literature Review: Releasing the Social Science Research Imagination . Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1998; Kennedy, Mary M. "Defining a Literature." Educational Researcher 36 (April 2007): 139-147; Petticrew, Mark and Helen Roberts. Systematic Reviews in the Social Sciences: A Practical Guide . Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers, 2006; Torracro, Richard. "Writing Integrative Literature Reviews: Guidelines and Examples." Human Resource Development Review 4 (September 2005): 356-367; Rocco, Tonette S. and Maria S. Plakhotnik. "Literature Reviews, Conceptual Frameworks, and Theoretical Frameworks: Terms, Functions, and Distinctions." Human Ressource Development Review 8 (March 2008): 120-130; Sutton, Anthea. Systematic Approaches to a Successful Literature Review . Los Angeles, CA: Sage Publications, 2016.

Structure and Writing Style

I.  Thinking About Your Literature Review

The structure of a literature review should include the following in support of understanding the research problem :

• An overview of the subject, issue, or theory under consideration, along with the objectives of the literature review,
• Division of works under review into themes or categories [e.g. works that support a particular position, those against, and those offering alternative approaches entirely],
• An explanation of how each work is similar to and how it varies from the others,
• Conclusions as to which pieces are best considered in their argument, are most convincing of their opinions, and make the greatest contribution to the understanding and development of their area of research.

The critical evaluation of each work should consider :

• Provenance -- what are the author's credentials? Are the author's arguments supported by evidence [e.g. primary historical material, case studies, narratives, statistics, recent scientific findings]?
• Methodology -- were the techniques used to identify, gather, and analyze the data appropriate to addressing the research problem? Was the sample size appropriate? Were the results effectively interpreted and reported?
• Objectivity -- is the author's perspective even-handed or prejudicial? Is contrary data considered or is certain pertinent information ignored to prove the author's point?
• Persuasiveness -- which of the author's theses are most convincing or least convincing?
• Validity -- are the author's arguments and conclusions convincing? Does the work ultimately contribute in any significant way to an understanding of the subject?

II.  Development of the Literature Review

Four Basic Stages of Writing 1.  Problem formulation -- which topic or field is being examined and what are its component issues? 2.  Literature search -- finding materials relevant to the subject being explored. 3.  Data evaluation -- determining which literature makes a significant contribution to the understanding of the topic. 4.  Analysis and interpretation -- discussing the findings and conclusions of pertinent literature.

Consider the following issues before writing the literature review: Clarify If your assignment is not specific about what form your literature review should take, seek clarification from your professor by asking these questions: 1.  Roughly how many sources would be appropriate to include? 2.  What types of sources should I review (books, journal articles, websites; scholarly versus popular sources)? 3.  Should I summarize, synthesize, or critique sources by discussing a common theme or issue? 4.  Should I evaluate the sources in any way beyond evaluating how they relate to understanding the research problem? 5.  Should I provide subheadings and other background information, such as definitions and/or a history? Find Models Use the exercise of reviewing the literature to examine how authors in your discipline or area of interest have composed their literature review sections. Read them to get a sense of the types of themes you might want to look for in your own research or to identify ways to organize your final review. The bibliography or reference section of sources you've already read, such as required readings in the course syllabus, are also excellent entry points into your own research. Narrow the Topic The narrower your topic, the easier it will be to limit the number of sources you need to read in order to obtain a good survey of relevant resources. Your professor will probably not expect you to read everything that's available about the topic, but you'll make the act of reviewing easier if you first limit scope of the research problem. A good strategy is to begin by searching the USC Libraries Catalog for recent books about the topic and review the table of contents for chapters that focuses on specific issues. You can also review the indexes of books to find references to specific issues that can serve as the focus of your research. For example, a book surveying the history of the Israeli-Palestinian conflict may include a chapter on the role Egypt has played in mediating the conflict, or look in the index for the pages where Egypt is mentioned in the text. Consider Whether Your Sources are Current Some disciplines require that you use information that is as current as possible. This is particularly true in disciplines in medicine and the sciences where research conducted becomes obsolete very quickly as new discoveries are made. However, when writing a review in the social sciences, a survey of the history of the literature may be required. In other words, a complete understanding the research problem requires you to deliberately examine how knowledge and perspectives have changed over time. Sort through other current bibliographies or literature reviews in the field to get a sense of what your discipline expects. You can also use this method to explore what is considered by scholars to be a "hot topic" and what is not.

III.  Ways to Organize Your Literature Review

Chronology of Events If your review follows the chronological method, you could write about the materials according to when they were published. This approach should only be followed if a clear path of research building on previous research can be identified and that these trends follow a clear chronological order of development. For example, a literature review that focuses on continuing research about the emergence of German economic power after the fall of the Soviet Union. By Publication Order your sources by publication chronology, then, only if the order demonstrates a more important trend. For instance, you could order a review of literature on environmental studies of brown fields if the progression revealed, for example, a change in the soil collection practices of the researchers who wrote and/or conducted the studies. Thematic [“conceptual categories”] A thematic literature review is the most common approach to summarizing prior research in the social and behavioral sciences. Thematic reviews are organized around a topic or issue, rather than the progression of time, although the progression of time may still be incorporated into a thematic review. For example, a review of the Internet’s impact on American presidential politics could focus on the development of online political satire. While the study focuses on one topic, the Internet’s impact on American presidential politics, it would still be organized chronologically reflecting technological developments in media. The difference in this example between a "chronological" and a "thematic" approach is what is emphasized the most: themes related to the role of the Internet in presidential politics. Note that more authentic thematic reviews tend to break away from chronological order. A review organized in this manner would shift between time periods within each section according to the point being made. Methodological A methodological approach focuses on the methods utilized by the researcher. For the Internet in American presidential politics project, one methodological approach would be to look at cultural differences between the portrayal of American presidents on American, British, and French websites. Or the review might focus on the fundraising impact of the Internet on a particular political party. A methodological scope will influence either the types of documents in the review or the way in which these documents are discussed.

Other Sections of Your Literature Review Once you've decided on the organizational method for your literature review, the sections you need to include in the paper should be easy to figure out because they arise from your organizational strategy. In other words, a chronological review would have subsections for each vital time period; a thematic review would have subtopics based upon factors that relate to the theme or issue. However, sometimes you may need to add additional sections that are necessary for your study, but do not fit in the organizational strategy of the body. What other sections you include in the body is up to you. However, only include what is necessary for the reader to locate your study within the larger scholarship about the research problem.

Here are examples of other sections, usually in the form of a single paragraph, you may need to include depending on the type of review you write:

• Current Situation : Information necessary to understand the current topic or focus of the literature review.
• Sources Used : Describes the methods and resources [e.g., databases] you used to identify the literature you reviewed.
• History : The chronological progression of the field, the research literature, or an idea that is necessary to understand the literature review, if the body of the literature review is not already a chronology.
• Selection Methods : Criteria you used to select (and perhaps exclude) sources in your literature review. For instance, you might explain that your review includes only peer-reviewed [i.e., scholarly] sources.
• Standards : Description of the way in which you present your information.
• Questions for Further Research : What questions about the field has the review sparked? How will you further your research as a result of the review?

IV.  Writing Your Literature Review

Once you've settled on how to organize your literature review, you're ready to write each section. When writing your review, keep in mind these issues.

Use Evidence A literature review section is, in this sense, just like any other academic research paper. Your interpretation of the available sources must be backed up with evidence [citations] that demonstrates that what you are saying is valid. Be Selective Select only the most important points in each source to highlight in the review. The type of information you choose to mention should relate directly to the research problem, whether it is thematic, methodological, or chronological. Related items that provide additional information, but that are not key to understanding the research problem, can be included in a list of further readings . Use Quotes Sparingly Some short quotes are appropriate if you want to emphasize a point, or if what an author stated cannot be easily paraphrased. Sometimes you may need to quote certain terminology that was coined by the author, is not common knowledge, or taken directly from the study. Do not use extensive quotes as a substitute for using your own words in reviewing the literature. Summarize and Synthesize Remember to summarize and synthesize your sources within each thematic paragraph as well as throughout the review. Recapitulate important features of a research study, but then synthesize it by rephrasing the study's significance and relating it to your own work and the work of others. Keep Your Own Voice While the literature review presents others' ideas, your voice [the writer's] should remain front and center. For example, weave references to other sources into what you are writing but maintain your own voice by starting and ending the paragraph with your own ideas and wording. Use Caution When Paraphrasing When paraphrasing a source that is not your own, be sure to represent the author's information or opinions accurately and in your own words. Even when paraphrasing an author’s work, you still must provide a citation to that work.

V.  Common Mistakes to Avoid

These are the most common mistakes made in reviewing social science research literature.

• Sources in your literature review do not clearly relate to the research problem;
• You do not take sufficient time to define and identify the most relevant sources to use in the literature review related to the research problem;
• Relies exclusively on secondary analytical sources rather than including relevant primary research studies or data;
• Uncritically accepts another researcher's findings and interpretations as valid, rather than examining critically all aspects of the research design and analysis;
• Does not describe the search procedures that were used in identifying the literature to review;
• Reports isolated statistical results rather than synthesizing them in chi-squared or meta-analytic methods; and,
• Only includes research that validates assumptions and does not consider contrary findings and alternative interpretations found in the literature.

Cook, Kathleen E. and Elise Murowchick. “Do Literature Review Skills Transfer from One Course to Another?” Psychology Learning and Teaching 13 (March 2014): 3-11; Fink, Arlene. Conducting Research Literature Reviews: From the Internet to Paper . 2nd ed. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, 2005; Hart, Chris. Doing a Literature Review: Releasing the Social Science Research Imagination . Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1998; Jesson, Jill. Doing Your Literature Review: Traditional and Systematic Techniques . London: SAGE, 2011; Literature Review Handout. Online Writing Center. Liberty University; Literature Reviews. The Writing Center. University of North Carolina; Onwuegbuzie, Anthony J. and Rebecca Frels. Seven Steps to a Comprehensive Literature Review: A Multimodal and Cultural Approach . Los Angeles, CA: SAGE, 2016; Ridley, Diana. The Literature Review: A Step-by-Step Guide for Students . 2nd ed. Los Angeles, CA: SAGE, 2012; Randolph, Justus J. “A Guide to Writing the Dissertation Literature Review." Practical Assessment, Research, and Evaluation. vol. 14, June 2009; Sutton, Anthea. Systematic Approaches to a Successful Literature Review . Los Angeles, CA: Sage Publications, 2016; Taylor, Dena. The Literature Review: A Few Tips On Conducting It. University College Writing Centre. University of Toronto; Writing a Literature Review. Academic Skills Centre. University of Canberra.

Writing Tip

Break Out of Your Disciplinary Box!

Thinking interdisciplinarily about a research problem can be a rewarding exercise in applying new ideas, theories, or concepts to an old problem. For example, what might cultural anthropologists say about the continuing conflict in the Middle East? In what ways might geographers view the need for better distribution of social service agencies in large cities than how social workers might study the issue? You don’t want to substitute a thorough review of core research literature in your discipline for studies conducted in other fields of study. However, particularly in the social sciences, thinking about research problems from multiple vectors is a key strategy for finding new solutions to a problem or gaining a new perspective. Consult with a librarian about identifying research databases in other disciplines; almost every field of study has at least one comprehensive database devoted to indexing its research literature.

Frodeman, Robert. The Oxford Handbook of Interdisciplinarity . New York: Oxford University Press, 2010.

Another Writing Tip

Don't Just Review for Content!

While conducting a review of the literature, maximize the time you devote to writing this part of your paper by thinking broadly about what you should be looking for and evaluating. Review not just what scholars are saying, but how are they saying it. Some questions to ask:

• How are they organizing their ideas?
• What methods have they used to study the problem?
• What theories have been used to explain, predict, or understand their research problem?
• What sources have they cited to support their conclusions?
• How have they used non-textual elements [e.g., charts, graphs, figures, etc.] to illustrate key points?

When you begin to write your literature review section, you'll be glad you dug deeper into how the research was designed and constructed because it establishes a means for developing more substantial analysis and interpretation of the research problem.

Hart, Chris. Doing a Literature Review: Releasing the Social Science Research Imagination . Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1 998.

Yet Another Writing Tip

When Do I Know I Can Stop Looking and Move On?

Here are several strategies you can utilize to assess whether you've thoroughly reviewed the literature:

• Look for repeating patterns in the research findings . If the same thing is being said, just by different people, then this likely demonstrates that the research problem has hit a conceptual dead end. At this point consider: Does your study extend current research?  Does it forge a new path? Or, does is merely add more of the same thing being said?
• Look at sources the authors cite to in their work . If you begin to see the same researchers cited again and again, then this is often an indication that no new ideas have been generated to address the research problem.
• Search Google Scholar to identify who has subsequently cited leading scholars already identified in your literature review [see next sub-tab]. This is called citation tracking and there are a number of sources that can help you identify who has cited whom, particularly scholars from outside of your discipline. Here again, if the same authors are being cited again and again, this may indicate no new literature has been written on the topic.

Onwuegbuzie, Anthony J. and Rebecca Frels. Seven Steps to a Comprehensive Literature Review: A Multimodal and Cultural Approach . Los Angeles, CA: Sage, 2016; Sutton, Anthea. Systematic Approaches to a Successful Literature Review . Los Angeles, CA: Sage Publications, 2016.

• << Previous: Theoretical Framework
• Next: Citation Tracking >>
• Last Updated: May 15, 2024 9:53 AM
• URL: https://libguides.usc.edu/writingguide

Research Methods

• Getting Started
• Literature Review Research
• Research Design
• Research Design By Discipline
• SAGE Research Methods
• Teaching with SAGE Research Methods

Literature Review

• What is a Literature Review?
• What is NOT a Literature Review?
• Purposes of a Literature Review
• Types of Literature Reviews
• Literature Reviews vs. Systematic Reviews
• Systematic vs. Meta-Analysis

Literature Review  is a comprehensive survey of the works published in a particular field of study or line of research, usually over a specific period of time, in the form of an in-depth, critical bibliographic essay or annotated list in which attention is drawn to the most significant works.

Also, we can define a literature review as the collected body of scholarly works related to a topic:

• Summarizes and analyzes previous research relevant to a topic
• Includes scholarly books and articles published in academic journals
• Can be an specific scholarly paper or a section in a research paper

The objective of a Literature Review is to find previous published scholarly works relevant to an specific topic

• Help gather ideas or information
• Keep up to date in current trends and findings
• Help develop new questions

A literature review is important because it:

• Explains the background of research on a topic.
• Demonstrates why a topic is significant to a subject area.
• Helps focus your own research questions or problems
• Discovers relationships between research studies/ideas.
• Suggests unexplored ideas or populations
• Identifies major themes, concepts, and researchers on a topic.
• Tests assumptions; may help counter preconceived ideas and remove unconscious bias.
• Identifies critical gaps, points of disagreement, or potentially flawed methodology or theoretical approaches.
• Indicates potential directions for future research.

All content in this section is from Literature Review Research from Old Dominion University 

Keep in mind the following, a literature review is NOT:

Not an essay 

Not an annotated bibliography  in which you summarize each article that you have reviewed.  A literature review goes beyond basic summarizing to focus on the critical analysis of the reviewed works and their relationship to your research question.

Not a research paper   where you select resources to support one side of an issue versus another.  A lit review should explain and consider all sides of an argument in order to avoid bias, and areas of agreement and disagreement should be highlighted.

A literature review serves several purposes. For example, it

• provides thorough knowledge of previous studies; introduces seminal works.
• helps focus one’s own research topic.
• identifies a conceptual framework for one’s own research questions or problems; indicates potential directions for future research.
• suggests previously unused or underused methodologies, designs, quantitative and qualitative strategies.
• identifies gaps in previous studies; identifies flawed methodologies and/or theoretical approaches; avoids replication of mistakes.
• helps the researcher avoid repetition of earlier research.
• suggests unexplored populations.
• determines whether past studies agree or disagree; identifies controversy in the literature.
• tests assumptions; may help counter preconceived ideas and remove unconscious bias.

As Kennedy (2007) notes*, it is important to think of knowledge in a given field as consisting of three layers. First, there are the primary studies that researchers conduct and publish. Second are the reviews of those studies that summarize and offer new interpretations built from and often extending beyond the original studies. Third, there are the perceptions, conclusions, opinion, and interpretations that are shared informally that become part of the lore of field. In composing a literature review, it is important to note that it is often this third layer of knowledge that is cited as "true" even though it often has only a loose relationship to the primary studies and secondary literature reviews.

Given this, while literature reviews are designed to provide an overview and synthesis of pertinent sources you have explored, there are several approaches to how they can be done, depending upon the type of analysis underpinning your study. Listed below are definitions of types of literature reviews:

Argumentative Review      This form examines literature selectively in order to support or refute an argument, deeply imbedded assumption, or philosophical problem already established in the literature. The purpose is to develop a body of literature that establishes a contrarian viewpoint. Given the value-laden nature of some social science research [e.g., educational reform; immigration control], argumentative approaches to analyzing the literature can be a legitimate and important form of discourse. However, note that they can also introduce problems of bias when they are used to to make summary claims of the sort found in systematic reviews.

Integrative Review      Considered a form of research that reviews, critiques, and synthesizes representative literature on a topic in an integrated way such that new frameworks and perspectives on the topic are generated. The body of literature includes all studies that address related or identical hypotheses. A well-done integrative review meets the same standards as primary research in regard to clarity, rigor, and replication.

Historical Review      Few things rest in isolation from historical precedent. Historical reviews are focused on examining research throughout a period of time, often starting with the first time an issue, concept, theory, phenomena emerged in the literature, then tracing its evolution within the scholarship of a discipline. The purpose is to place research in a historical context to show familiarity with state-of-the-art developments and to identify the likely directions for future research.

Methodological Review      A review does not always focus on what someone said [content], but how they said it [method of analysis]. This approach provides a framework of understanding at different levels (i.e. those of theory, substantive fields, research approaches and data collection and analysis techniques), enables researchers to draw on a wide variety of knowledge ranging from the conceptual level to practical documents for use in fieldwork in the areas of ontological and epistemological consideration, quantitative and qualitative integration, sampling, interviewing, data collection and data analysis, and helps highlight many ethical issues which we should be aware of and consider as we go through our study.

Systematic Review      This form consists of an overview of existing evidence pertinent to a clearly formulated research question, which uses pre-specified and standardized methods to identify and critically appraise relevant research, and to collect, report, and analyse data from the studies that are included in the review. Typically it focuses on a very specific empirical question, often posed in a cause-and-effect form, such as "To what extent does A contribute to B?"

Theoretical Review      The purpose of this form is to concretely examine the corpus of theory that has accumulated in regard to an issue, concept, theory, phenomena. The theoretical literature review help establish what theories already exist, the relationships between them, to what degree the existing theories have been investigated, and to develop new hypotheses to be tested. Often this form is used to help establish a lack of appropriate theories or reveal that current theories are inadequate for explaining new or emerging research problems. The unit of analysis can focus on a theoretical concept or a whole theory or framework.

* Kennedy, Mary M. "Defining a Literature."  Educational Researcher  36 (April 2007): 139-147.

All content in this section is from The Literature Review created by Dr. Robert Larabee USC

Robinson, P. and Lowe, J. (2015),  Literature reviews vs systematic reviews.  Australian and New Zealand Journal of Public Health, 39: 103-103. doi: 10.1111/1753-6405.12393

What's in the name? The difference between a Systematic Review and a Literature Review, and why it matters . By Lynn Kysh from University of Southern California

Systematic review or meta-analysis?

A  systematic review  answers a defined research question by collecting and summarizing all empirical evidence that fits pre-specified eligibility criteria.

A  meta-analysis  is the use of statistical methods to summarize the results of these studies.

Systematic reviews, just like other research articles, can be of varying quality. They are a significant piece of work (the Centre for Reviews and Dissemination at York estimates that a team will take 9-24 months), and to be useful to other researchers and practitioners they should have:

• clearly stated objectives with pre-defined eligibility criteria for studies
• explicit, reproducible methodology
• a systematic search that attempts to identify all studies
• assessment of the validity of the findings of the included studies (e.g. risk of bias)
• systematic presentation, and synthesis, of the characteristics and findings of the included studies

Not all systematic reviews contain meta-analysis. 

Meta-analysis is the use of statistical methods to summarize the results of independent studies. By combining information from all relevant studies, meta-analysis can provide more precise estimates of the effects of health care than those derived from the individual studies included within a review.  More information on meta-analyses can be found in  Cochrane Handbook, Chapter 9 .

A meta-analysis goes beyond critique and integration and conducts secondary statistical analysis on the outcomes of similar studies.  It is a systematic review that uses quantitative methods to synthesize and summarize the results.

An advantage of a meta-analysis is the ability to be completely objective in evaluating research findings.  Not all topics, however, have sufficient research evidence to allow a meta-analysis to be conducted.  In that case, an integrative review is an appropriate strategy. 

Some of the content in this section is from Systematic reviews and meta-analyses: step by step guide created by Kate McAllister.

• << Previous: Getting Started
• Next: Research Design >>
• Last Updated: Aug 21, 2023 4:07 PM
• URL: https://guides.lib.udel.edu/researchmethods

Literature Reviews

• Getting started

What is a literature review?

Why conduct a literature review, stages of a literature review, lit reviews: an overview (video), check out these books.

• Types of reviews
• 1. Define your research question
• 2. Plan your search
• 3. Search the literature
• 4. Organize your results
• 5. Synthesize your findings
• 6. Write the review
• Artificial intelligence (AI) tools
• Thompson Writing Studio This link opens in a new window
• Need to write a systematic review? This link opens in a new window

Contact a Librarian

Ask a Librarian

Definition: A literature review is a systematic examination and synthesis of existing scholarly research on a specific topic or subject.

Purpose: It serves to provide a comprehensive overview of the current state of knowledge within a particular field.

Analysis: Involves critically evaluating and summarizing key findings, methodologies, and debates found in academic literature.

Identifying Gaps: Aims to pinpoint areas where there is a lack of research or unresolved questions, highlighting opportunities for further investigation.

Contextualization: Enables researchers to understand how their work fits into the broader academic conversation and contributes to the existing body of knowledge.

tl;dr  A literature review critically examines and synthesizes existing scholarly research and publications on a specific topic to provide a comprehensive understanding of the current state of knowledge in the field.

What is a literature review NOT?

❌ An annotated bibliography

❌ Original research

❌ A summary

❌ Something to be conducted at the end of your research

❌ An opinion piece

❌ A chronological compilation of studies

The reason for conducting a literature review is to:

Literature Reviews: An Overview for Graduate Students

While this 9-minute video from NCSU is geared toward graduate students, it is useful for anyone conducting a literature review.

Writing the literature review: A practical guide

Available 3rd floor of Perkins

Writing literature reviews: A guide for students of the social and behavioral sciences

Available online!

So, you have to write a literature review: A guided workbook for engineers

Telling a research story: Writing a literature review

The literature review: Six steps to success

Systematic approaches to a successful literature review

Request from Duke Medical Center Library

Doing a systematic review: A student's guide

• Next: Types of reviews >>
• Last Updated: May 17, 2024 8:42 AM
• URL: https://guides.library.duke.edu/litreviews

Services for...

• Faculty & Instructors
• Graduate Students
• Undergraduate Students
• International Students
• Patrons with Disabilities

• Harmful Language Statement
• Re-use & Attribution / Privacy
• Support the Libraries

Get science-backed answers as you write with Paperpal's Research feature

What is a Literature Review? How to Write It (with Examples)

A literature review is a critical analysis and synthesis of existing research on a particular topic. It provides an overview of the current state of knowledge, identifies gaps, and highlights key findings in the literature. 1 The purpose of a literature review is to situate your own research within the context of existing scholarship, demonstrating your understanding of the topic and showing how your work contributes to the ongoing conversation in the field. Learning how to write a literature review is a critical tool for successful research. Your ability to summarize and synthesize prior research pertaining to a certain topic demonstrates your grasp on the topic of study, and assists in the learning process. 

Table of Contents

• What is the purpose of literature review? 
• a. Habitat Loss and Species Extinction: 
• b. Range Shifts and Phenological Changes: 
• c. Ocean Acidification and Coral Reefs: 
• d. Adaptive Strategies and Conservation Efforts: 

How to write a good literature review 

• Choose a Topic and Define the Research Question: 
• Decide on the Scope of Your Review: 
• Select Databases for Searches: 
• Conduct Searches and Keep Track: 
• Review the Literature: 
• Organize and Write Your Literature Review: 
• How to write a literature review faster with Paperpal? 
• Frequently asked questions 

What is a literature review?

A well-conducted literature review demonstrates the researcher’s familiarity with the existing literature, establishes the context for their own research, and contributes to scholarly conversations on the topic. One of the purposes of a literature review is also to help researchers avoid duplicating previous work and ensure that their research is informed by and builds upon the existing body of knowledge.

What is the purpose of literature review?

A literature review serves several important purposes within academic and research contexts. Here are some key objectives and functions of a literature review: 2  

1. Contextualizing the Research Problem: The literature review provides a background and context for the research problem under investigation. It helps to situate the study within the existing body of knowledge. 

2. Identifying Gaps in Knowledge: By identifying gaps, contradictions, or areas requiring further research, the researcher can shape the research question and justify the significance of the study. This is crucial for ensuring that the new research contributes something novel to the field. 

Find academic papers related to your research topic faster. Try Research on Paperpal  

3. Understanding Theoretical and Conceptual Frameworks: Literature reviews help researchers gain an understanding of the theoretical and conceptual frameworks used in previous studies. This aids in the development of a theoretical framework for the current research. 

4. Providing Methodological Insights: Another purpose of literature reviews is that it allows researchers to learn about the methodologies employed in previous studies. This can help in choosing appropriate research methods for the current study and avoiding pitfalls that others may have encountered. 

5. Establishing Credibility: A well-conducted literature review demonstrates the researcher’s familiarity with existing scholarship, establishing their credibility and expertise in the field. It also helps in building a solid foundation for the new research. 

6. Informing Hypotheses or Research Questions: The literature review guides the formulation of hypotheses or research questions by highlighting relevant findings and areas of uncertainty in existing literature. 

Literature review example

Let’s delve deeper with a literature review example: Let’s say your literature review is about the impact of climate change on biodiversity. You might format your literature review into sections such as the effects of climate change on habitat loss and species extinction, phenological changes, and marine biodiversity. Each section would then summarize and analyze relevant studies in those areas, highlighting key findings and identifying gaps in the research. The review would conclude by emphasizing the need for further research on specific aspects of the relationship between climate change and biodiversity. The following literature review template provides a glimpse into the recommended literature review structure and content, demonstrating how research findings are organized around specific themes within a broader topic. 

Literature Review on Climate Change Impacts on Biodiversity:

Climate change is a global phenomenon with far-reaching consequences, including significant impacts on biodiversity. This literature review synthesizes key findings from various studies: 

a. Habitat Loss and Species Extinction:

Climate change-induced alterations in temperature and precipitation patterns contribute to habitat loss, affecting numerous species (Thomas et al., 2004). The review discusses how these changes increase the risk of extinction, particularly for species with specific habitat requirements. 

b. Range Shifts and Phenological Changes:

Observations of range shifts and changes in the timing of biological events (phenology) are documented in response to changing climatic conditions (Parmesan & Yohe, 2003). These shifts affect ecosystems and may lead to mismatches between species and their resources. 

c. Ocean Acidification and Coral Reefs:

The review explores the impact of climate change on marine biodiversity, emphasizing ocean acidification’s threat to coral reefs (Hoegh-Guldberg et al., 2007). Changes in pH levels negatively affect coral calcification, disrupting the delicate balance of marine ecosystems. 

d. Adaptive Strategies and Conservation Efforts:

Recognizing the urgency of the situation, the literature review discusses various adaptive strategies adopted by species and conservation efforts aimed at mitigating the impacts of climate change on biodiversity (Hannah et al., 2007). It emphasizes the importance of interdisciplinary approaches for effective conservation planning. 

Strengthen your literature review with factual insights. Try Research on Paperpal for free!    

Writing a literature review involves summarizing and synthesizing existing research on a particular topic. A good literature review format should include the following elements. 

Introduction: The introduction sets the stage for your literature review, providing context and introducing the main focus of your review. 

• Opening Statement: Begin with a general statement about the broader topic and its significance in the field. 
• Scope and Purpose: Clearly define the scope of your literature review. Explain the specific research question or objective you aim to address. 
• Organizational Framework: Briefly outline the structure of your literature review, indicating how you will categorize and discuss the existing research. 
• Significance of the Study: Highlight why your literature review is important and how it contributes to the understanding of the chosen topic. 
• Thesis Statement: Conclude the introduction with a concise thesis statement that outlines the main argument or perspective you will develop in the body of the literature review. 

Body: The body of the literature review is where you provide a comprehensive analysis of existing literature, grouping studies based on themes, methodologies, or other relevant criteria. 

• Organize by Theme or Concept: Group studies that share common themes, concepts, or methodologies. Discuss each theme or concept in detail, summarizing key findings and identifying gaps or areas of disagreement. 
• Critical Analysis: Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of each study. Discuss the methodologies used, the quality of evidence, and the overall contribution of each work to the understanding of the topic. 
• Synthesis of Findings: Synthesize the information from different studies to highlight trends, patterns, or areas of consensus in the literature. 
• Identification of Gaps: Discuss any gaps or limitations in the existing research and explain how your review contributes to filling these gaps. 
• Transition between Sections: Provide smooth transitions between different themes or concepts to maintain the flow of your literature review. 

Write and Cite as you go with Paperpal Research. Start now for free.   

Conclusion: The conclusion of your literature review should summarize the main findings, highlight the contributions of the review, and suggest avenues for future research. 

• Summary of Key Findings: Recap the main findings from the literature and restate how they contribute to your research question or objective. 
• Contributions to the Field: Discuss the overall contribution of your literature review to the existing knowledge in the field. 
• Implications and Applications: Explore the practical implications of the findings and suggest how they might impact future research or practice. 
• Recommendations for Future Research: Identify areas that require further investigation and propose potential directions for future research in the field. 
• Final Thoughts: Conclude with a final reflection on the importance of your literature review and its relevance to the broader academic community. 

Conducting a literature review

Conducting a literature review is an essential step in research that involves reviewing and analyzing existing literature on a specific topic. It’s important to know how to do a literature review effectively, so here are the steps to follow: 1  

Choose a Topic and Define the Research Question:

• Select a topic that is relevant to your field of study. 
• Clearly define your research question or objective. Determine what specific aspect of the topic do you want to explore? 

Decide on the Scope of Your Review:

• Determine the timeframe for your literature review. Are you focusing on recent developments, or do you want a historical overview? 
• Consider the geographical scope. Is your review global, or are you focusing on a specific region? 
• Define the inclusion and exclusion criteria. What types of sources will you include? Are there specific types of studies or publications you will exclude? 

Select Databases for Searches:

• Identify relevant databases for your field. Examples include PubMed, IEEE Xplore, Scopus, Web of Science, and Google Scholar. 
• Consider searching in library catalogs, institutional repositories, and specialized databases related to your topic. 

Conduct Searches and Keep Track:

• Develop a systematic search strategy using keywords, Boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT), and other search techniques. 
• Record and document your search strategy for transparency and replicability. 
• Keep track of the articles, including publication details, abstracts, and links. Use citation management tools like EndNote, Zotero, or Mendeley to organize your references. 

Review the Literature:

• Evaluate the relevance and quality of each source. Consider the methodology, sample size, and results of studies. 
• Organize the literature by themes or key concepts. Identify patterns, trends, and gaps in the existing research. 
• Summarize key findings and arguments from each source. Compare and contrast different perspectives. 
• Identify areas where there is a consensus in the literature and where there are conflicting opinions. 
• Provide critical analysis and synthesis of the literature. What are the strengths and weaknesses of existing research? 

Organize and Write Your Literature Review:

• Literature review outline should be based on themes, chronological order, or methodological approaches. 
• Write a clear and coherent narrative that synthesizes the information gathered. 
• Use proper citations for each source and ensure consistency in your citation style (APA, MLA, Chicago, etc.). 
• Conclude your literature review by summarizing key findings, identifying gaps, and suggesting areas for future research. 

Whether you’re exploring a new research field or finding new angles to develop an existing topic, sifting through hundreds of papers can take more time than you have to spare. But what if you could find science-backed insights with verified citations in seconds? That’s the power of Paperpal’s new Research feature!  

How to write a literature review faster with Paperpal?

Paperpal, an AI writing assistant, integrates powerful academic search capabilities within its writing platform. With the Research feature, you get 100% factual insights, with citations backed by 250M+ verified research articles, directly within your writing interface with the option to save relevant references in your Citation Library. By eliminating the need to switch tabs to find answers to all your research questions, Paperpal saves time and helps you stay focused on your writing.   

Here’s how to use the Research feature:  

• Ask a question: Get started with a new document on paperpal.com. Click on the “Research” feature and type your question in plain English. Paperpal will scour over 250 million research articles, including conference papers and preprints, to provide you with accurate insights and citations. 
• Review and Save: Paperpal summarizes the information, while citing sources and listing relevant reads. You can quickly scan the results to identify relevant references and save these directly to your built-in citations library for later access. 
• Cite with Confidence: Paperpal makes it easy to incorporate relevant citations and references into your writing, ensuring your arguments are well-supported by credible sources. This translates to a polished, well-researched literature review. 

The literature review sample and detailed advice on writing and conducting a review will help you produce a well-structured report. But remember that a good literature review is an ongoing process, and it may be necessary to revisit and update it as your research progresses. By combining effortless research with an easy citation process, Paperpal Research streamlines the literature review process and empowers you to write faster and with more confidence. Try Paperpal Research now and see for yourself.  

Frequently asked questions

A literature review is a critical and comprehensive analysis of existing literature (published and unpublished works) on a specific topic or research question and provides a synthesis of the current state of knowledge in a particular field. A well-conducted literature review is crucial for researchers to build upon existing knowledge, avoid duplication of efforts, and contribute to the advancement of their field. It also helps researchers situate their work within a broader context and facilitates the development of a sound theoretical and conceptual framework for their studies.

Literature review is a crucial component of research writing, providing a solid background for a research paper’s investigation. The aim is to keep professionals up to date by providing an understanding of ongoing developments within a specific field, including research methods, and experimental techniques used in that field, and present that knowledge in the form of a written report. Also, the depth and breadth of the literature review emphasizes the credibility of the scholar in his or her field.  

Before writing a literature review, it’s essential to undertake several preparatory steps to ensure that your review is well-researched, organized, and focused. This includes choosing a topic of general interest to you and doing exploratory research on that topic, writing an annotated bibliography, and noting major points, especially those that relate to the position you have taken on the topic. 

Literature reviews and academic research papers are essential components of scholarly work but serve different purposes within the academic realm. 3 A literature review aims to provide a foundation for understanding the current state of research on a particular topic, identify gaps or controversies, and lay the groundwork for future research. Therefore, it draws heavily from existing academic sources, including books, journal articles, and other scholarly publications. In contrast, an academic research paper aims to present new knowledge, contribute to the academic discourse, and advance the understanding of a specific research question. Therefore, it involves a mix of existing literature (in the introduction and literature review sections) and original data or findings obtained through research methods. 

Literature reviews are essential components of academic and research papers, and various strategies can be employed to conduct them effectively. If you want to know how to write a literature review for a research paper, here are four common approaches that are often used by researchers.  Chronological Review: This strategy involves organizing the literature based on the chronological order of publication. It helps to trace the development of a topic over time, showing how ideas, theories, and research have evolved.  Thematic Review: Thematic reviews focus on identifying and analyzing themes or topics that cut across different studies. Instead of organizing the literature chronologically, it is grouped by key themes or concepts, allowing for a comprehensive exploration of various aspects of the topic.  Methodological Review: This strategy involves organizing the literature based on the research methods employed in different studies. It helps to highlight the strengths and weaknesses of various methodologies and allows the reader to evaluate the reliability and validity of the research findings.  Theoretical Review: A theoretical review examines the literature based on the theoretical frameworks used in different studies. This approach helps to identify the key theories that have been applied to the topic and assess their contributions to the understanding of the subject.  It’s important to note that these strategies are not mutually exclusive, and a literature review may combine elements of more than one approach. The choice of strategy depends on the research question, the nature of the literature available, and the goals of the review. Additionally, other strategies, such as integrative reviews or systematic reviews, may be employed depending on the specific requirements of the research.

The literature review format can vary depending on the specific publication guidelines. However, there are some common elements and structures that are often followed. Here is a general guideline for the format of a literature review:  Introduction:   Provide an overview of the topic.  Define the scope and purpose of the literature review.  State the research question or objective.  Body:   Organize the literature by themes, concepts, or chronology.  Critically analyze and evaluate each source.  Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of the studies.  Highlight any methodological limitations or biases.  Identify patterns, connections, or contradictions in the existing research.  Conclusion:   Summarize the key points discussed in the literature review.  Highlight the research gap.  Address the research question or objective stated in the introduction.  Highlight the contributions of the review and suggest directions for future research.

Both annotated bibliographies and literature reviews involve the examination of scholarly sources. While annotated bibliographies focus on individual sources with brief annotations, literature reviews provide a more in-depth, integrated, and comprehensive analysis of existing literature on a specific topic. The key differences are as follows: 

References 

• Denney, A. S., & Tewksbury, R. (2013). How to write a literature review.  Journal of criminal justice education ,  24 (2), 218-234. 
• Pan, M. L. (2016).  Preparing literature reviews: Qualitative and quantitative approaches . Taylor & Francis. 
• Cantero, C. (2019). How to write a literature review.  San José State University Writing Center . 

Paperpal is an AI writing assistant that help academics write better, faster with real-time suggestions for in-depth language and grammar correction. Trained on millions of research manuscripts enhanced by professional academic editors, Paperpal delivers human precision at machine speed.  

Try it for free or upgrade to  Paperpal Prime , which unlocks unlimited access to premium features like academic translation, paraphrasing, contextual synonyms, consistency checks and more. It’s like always having a professional academic editor by your side! Go beyond limitations and experience the future of academic writing.  Get Paperpal Prime now at just US$19 a month!

Related Reads:

• Empirical Research: A Comprehensive Guide for Academics 
• How to Write a Scientific Paper in 10 Steps 
• How Long Should a Chapter Be?
• How to Use Paperpal to Generate Emails & Cover Letters?

6 Tips for Post-Doc Researchers to Take Their Career to the Next Level

Self-plagiarism in research: what it is and how to avoid it, you may also like, how to write a high-quality conference paper, how paperpal’s research feature helps you develop and..., how paperpal is enhancing academic productivity and accelerating..., how to write a successful book chapter for..., academic editing: how to self-edit academic text with..., 4 ways paperpal encourages responsible writing with ai, what are scholarly sources and where can you..., how to write a hypothesis types and examples , measuring academic success: definition & strategies for excellence, what is academic writing: tips for students.

Home » Education » What is the Difference Between Literature Review and Theoretical Framework

What is the Difference Between Literature Review and Theoretical Framework

The main difference between literature review and theoretical framework is their function. The literature review explores what has already been written about the topic under study in order to highlight a gap, whereas the theoretical framework is the conceptual and analytical approach the researcher is going to take to fill that gap.

Literature review and theoretical framework are two indispensable components of research . Both are equally important for the foundation of a research study.

Key Areas Covered

1.  What is Literature Review       – Definition, Features 2.  What is Theoretical Framework      – Definition, Features 3.  Difference Between Literature Review and Theoretical Framework      – Comparison of Key Differences

What is a Literature Review

A literature review is a vital component of a research study. A literature review is a discussion on the already existing material in the subject area. Thus, this will require a collection of published (in print or online) work concerning the selected research area. In other words, a literature review is a review of the literature in the related subject area. A literature review makes a case for the research study. It analyzes the existing literature in order to identify and highlight a gap in the literature.

Moreover, a good literature review is a critical discussion, displaying the writer’s knowledge of relevant theories and approaches and awareness of contrasting arguments. A literature review should have the following features (Caulley, 1992)

• Compare and contrast different researchers’ views
• Identify areas in which researchers are in disagreement
• Group researchers who have similar conclusions
• Criticize the  methodology
• Highlight exemplary studies
• Highlight gaps in research
• Indicate the connection between your study and previous studies
• Indicate how your study will contribute to the literature in general
• Conclude by summarizing what the literature indicates

Furthermore, the structure of a literature review is similar to that of an article or essay . Overall, literature reviews help researchers to evaluate the existing literature, identify a gap in the research area, place their study in the existing research and identify future research.

What is a Theoretical Framework

The theoretical framework is the research component that introduces and describes the theory that explains why the research problem under study exists. It is also the conceptual and analytical approach the researcher is going to take to fill the research gap identified by the literature review. Moreover, it is the structure that holds the structure of the research theory.

The researcher may not easily find the theoretical framework within the literature. Therefore, he or she may have to go through many research studies and course readings for theories and models relevant to the research problem under investigation. In addition, the theory must be selected based on its relevance, ease of application, and explanatory power.

Difference Between Literature Review and Theoretical Framework

A literature review is a critical evaluation of the existing published work in a selected research area, while a theoretical framework is a component in research that introduces and describes the theory behind the research problem.

Moreover, the literature review explores what has already been written about the topic under investigation in order to highlight a gap, whereas the theoretical framework is the conceptual and analytical approach the researcher is going to take to fill that gap. Therefore, a literature review is backwards-looking while theory framework is forward-looking.

In conclusion, the main difference between literature review and theoretical framework is their function. The literature review explores what has already been written about the topic under study in order to highlight a gap, whereas the theoretical framework is the conceptual and analytical approach the researcher is going to take to fill that gap.

1. Caulley, D. N. “Writing a critical review of the literature.” La Trobe University: Bundoora (1992). 2. “ Organizing Your Social Sciences Research Paper: Theoretical Framework .” Research Guide.

Image Courtesy:

About the Author: Hasa

Hasanthi is a seasoned content writer and editor with over 8 years of experience. Armed with a BA degree in English and a knack for digital marketing, she explores her passions for literature, history, culture, and food through her engaging and informative writing.

​You May Also Like These

Leave a reply cancel reply.

Literature Review: Types of Literature Reviews

• Literature Review
• Purpose of a Literature Review
• Work in Progress
• Compiling & Writing
• Books, Articles, & Web Pages

Types of Literature Reviews

• Departmental Differences
• Citation Styles & Plagiarism
• Know the Difference! Systematic Review vs. Literature Review

It is important to think of knowledge in a given field as consisting of three layers.

• First, there are the primary studies that researchers conduct and publish.
• Second, are the reviews of those studies that summarize and offer new interpretations built from and often extending beyond the original studies.
• Third, there are the perceptions, conclusions, opinions, and interpretations that are shared informally that become part of the lore of the field.

In composing a literature review, it is important to note that it is often this third layer of knowledge that is cited as "true" even though it often has only a loose relationship to the primary studies and secondary literature reviews.

Given this, while literature reviews are designed to provide an overview and synthesis of pertinent sources you have explored, there are several approaches to how they can be done, depending upon the type of analysis underpinning your study. Listed below are definitions of types of literature reviews:

Argumentative Review      This form examines literature selectively in order to support or refute an argument, deeply embedded assumption, or philosophical problem already established in the literature. The purpose is to develop a body of literature that establishes a contrarian viewpoint. Given the value-laden nature of some social science research [e.g., educational reform; immigration control], argumentative approaches to analyzing the literature can be a legitimate and important form of discourse. However, note that they can also introduce problems of bias when they are used to make summary claims of the sort found in systematic reviews.

Integrative Review      Considered a form of research that reviews, critiques, and synthesizes representative literature on a topic in an integrated way such that new frameworks and perspectives on the topic are generated. The body of literature includes all studies that address related or identical hypotheses. A well-done integrative review meets the same standards as primary research in regard to clarity, rigor, and replication.

Historical Review      Few things rest in isolation from historical precedent. Historical reviews are focused on examining research throughout a period of time, often starting with the first time an issue, concept, theory, phenomenon emerged in the literature, then tracing its evolution within the scholarship of a discipline. The purpose is to place research in a historical context to show familiarity with state-of-the-art developments and to identify the likely directions for future research.

Methodological Review      A review does not always focus on what someone said [content], but how they said it [method of analysis]. This approach provides a framework of understanding at different levels (i.e. those of theory, substantive fields, research approaches, and data collection and analysis techniques), enables researchers to draw on a wide variety of knowledge ranging from the conceptual level to practical documents for use in fieldwork in the areas of ontological and epistemological consideration, quantitative and qualitative integration, sampling, interviewing, data collection and data analysis, and helps highlight many ethical issues which we should be aware of and consider as we go through our study.

Systematic Review      This form consists of an overview of existing evidence pertinent to a clearly formulated research question, which uses pre-specified and standardized methods to identify and critically appraise relevant research, and to collect, report, and analyze data from the studies that are included in the review. Typically it focuses on a very specific empirical question, often posed in a cause-and-effect form, such as "To what extent does A contribute to B?"

Theoretical Review      The purpose of this form is to concretely examine the corpus of theory that has accumulated in regard to an issue, concept, theory, phenomenon. The theoretical literature review help establish what theories already exist, the relationships between them, to what degree the existing theories have been investigated, and to develop new hypotheses to be tested. Often this form is used to help establish a lack of appropriate theories or reveal that current theories are inadequate for explaining new or emerging research problems. The unit of analysis can focus on a theoretical concept or a whole theory or framework.

* Kennedy, Mary M. "Defining a Literature." Educational Researcher 36 (April 2007): 139-147.

All content is from The Literature Review created by Dr. Robert Larabee USC

• << Previous: Books, Articles, & Web Pages
• Next: Departmental Differences >>
• Last Updated: Oct 19, 2023 12:07 PM
• URL: https://uscupstate.libguides.com/Literature_Review

• University of Texas Libraries

Literature Reviews

• What is a literature review?
• Steps in the Literature Review Process
• Define your research question
• Determine inclusion and exclusion criteria
• Choose databases and search
• Review Results
• Synthesize Results
• Analyze Results
• Librarian Support

What is a Literature Review?

A literature or narrative review is a comprehensive review and analysis of the published literature on a specific topic or research question. The literature that is reviewed contains: books, articles, academic articles, conference proceedings, association papers, and dissertations. It contains the most pertinent studies and points to important past and current research and practices. It provides background and context, and shows how your research will contribute to the field. 

A literature review should: 

• Provide a comprehensive and updated review of the literature;
• Explain why this review has taken place;
• Articulate a position or hypothesis;
• Acknowledge and account for conflicting and corroborating points of view

From  S age Research Methods

Purpose of a Literature Review

A literature review can be written as an introduction to a study to:

• Demonstrate how a study fills a gap in research
• Compare a study with other research that's been done

Or it can be a separate work (a research article on its own) which:

• Organizes or describes a topic
• Describes variables within a particular issue/problem

Limitations of a Literature Review

Some of the limitations of a literature review are:

• It's a snapshot in time. Unlike other reviews, this one has beginning, a middle and an end. There may be future developments that could make your work less relevant.
• It may be too focused. Some niche studies may miss the bigger picture.
• It can be difficult to be comprehensive. There is no way to make sure all the literature on a topic was considered.
• It is easy to be biased if you stick to top tier journals. There may be other places where people are publishing exemplary research. Look to open access publications and conferences to reflect a more inclusive collection. Also, make sure to include opposing views (and not just supporting evidence).

Source: Grant, Maria J., and Andrew Booth. “A Typology of Reviews: An Analysis of 14 Review Types and Associated Methodologies.” Health Information & Libraries Journal, vol. 26, no. 2, June 2009, pp. 91–108. Wiley Online Library, doi:10.1111/j.1471-1842.2009.00848.x.

Meryl Brodsky : Communication and Information Studies

Hannah Chapman Tripp : Biology, Neuroscience

Carolyn Cunningham : Human Development & Family Sciences, Psychology, Sociology

Larayne Dallas : Engineering

Janelle Hedstrom : Special Education, Curriculum & Instruction, Ed Leadership & Policy ​

Susan Macicak : Linguistics

Imelda Vetter : Dell Medical School

For help in other subject areas, please see the guide to library specialists by subject .

Periodically, UT Libraries runs a workshop covering the basics and library support for literature reviews. While we try to offer these once per academic year, we find providing the recording to be helpful to community members who have missed the session. Following is the most recent recording of the workshop, Conducting a Literature Review. To view the recording, a UT login is required.

• October 26, 2022 recording
• Last Updated: Oct 26, 2022 2:49 PM
• URL: https://guides.lib.utexas.edu/literaturereviews

An official website of the United States government

The .gov means it's official. Federal government websites often end in .gov or .mil. Before sharing sensitive information, make sure you're on a federal government site.

The site is secure. The https:// ensures that you are connecting to the official website and that any information you provide is encrypted and transmitted securely.

• Publications
• Account settings
• Browse Titles

NCBI Bookshelf. A service of the National Library of Medicine, National Institutes of Health.

Lau F, Kuziemsky C, editors. Handbook of eHealth Evaluation: An Evidence-based Approach [Internet]. Victoria (BC): University of Victoria; 2017 Feb 27.

Handbook of eHealth Evaluation: An Evidence-based Approach [Internet].

Chapter 9 methods for literature reviews.

Guy Paré and Spyros Kitsiou .

9.1. Introduction

Literature reviews play a critical role in scholarship because science remains, first and foremost, a cumulative endeavour ( vom Brocke et al., 2009 ). As in any academic discipline, rigorous knowledge syntheses are becoming indispensable in keeping up with an exponentially growing eHealth literature, assisting practitioners, academics, and graduate students in finding, evaluating, and synthesizing the contents of many empirical and conceptual papers. Among other methods, literature reviews are essential for: (a) identifying what has been written on a subject or topic; (b) determining the extent to which a specific research area reveals any interpretable trends or patterns; (c) aggregating empirical findings related to a narrow research question to support evidence-based practice; (d) generating new frameworks and theories; and (e) identifying topics or questions requiring more investigation ( Paré, Trudel, Jaana, & Kitsiou, 2015 ).

Literature reviews can take two major forms. The most prevalent one is the “literature review” or “background” section within a journal paper or a chapter in a graduate thesis. This section synthesizes the extant literature and usually identifies the gaps in knowledge that the empirical study addresses ( Sylvester, Tate, & Johnstone, 2013 ). It may also provide a theoretical foundation for the proposed study, substantiate the presence of the research problem, justify the research as one that contributes something new to the cumulated knowledge, or validate the methods and approaches for the proposed study ( Hart, 1998 ; Levy & Ellis, 2006 ).

The second form of literature review, which is the focus of this chapter, constitutes an original and valuable work of research in and of itself ( Paré et al., 2015 ). Rather than providing a base for a researcher’s own work, it creates a solid starting point for all members of the community interested in a particular area or topic ( Mulrow, 1987 ). The so-called “review article” is a journal-length paper which has an overarching purpose to synthesize the literature in a field, without collecting or analyzing any primary data ( Green, Johnson, & Adams, 2006 ).

When appropriately conducted, review articles represent powerful information sources for practitioners looking for state-of-the art evidence to guide their decision-making and work practices ( Paré et al., 2015 ). Further, high-quality reviews become frequently cited pieces of work which researchers seek out as a first clear outline of the literature when undertaking empirical studies ( Cooper, 1988 ; Rowe, 2014 ). Scholars who track and gauge the impact of articles have found that review papers are cited and downloaded more often than any other type of published article ( Cronin, Ryan, & Coughlan, 2008 ; Montori, Wilczynski, Morgan, Haynes, & Hedges, 2003 ; Patsopoulos, Analatos, & Ioannidis, 2005 ). The reason for their popularity may be the fact that reading the review enables one to have an overview, if not a detailed knowledge of the area in question, as well as references to the most useful primary sources ( Cronin et al., 2008 ). Although they are not easy to conduct, the commitment to complete a review article provides a tremendous service to one’s academic community ( Paré et al., 2015 ; Petticrew & Roberts, 2006 ). Most, if not all, peer-reviewed journals in the fields of medical informatics publish review articles of some type.

The main objectives of this chapter are fourfold: (a) to provide an overview of the major steps and activities involved in conducting a stand-alone literature review; (b) to describe and contrast the different types of review articles that can contribute to the eHealth knowledge base; (c) to illustrate each review type with one or two examples from the eHealth literature; and (d) to provide a series of recommendations for prospective authors of review articles in this domain.

9.2. Overview of the Literature Review Process and Steps

As explained in Templier and Paré (2015) , there are six generic steps involved in conducting a review article:

• formulating the research question(s) and objective(s),
• searching the extant literature,
• screening for inclusion,
• assessing the quality of primary studies,
• extracting data, and
• analyzing data.

Although these steps are presented here in sequential order, one must keep in mind that the review process can be iterative and that many activities can be initiated during the planning stage and later refined during subsequent phases ( Finfgeld-Connett & Johnson, 2013 ; Kitchenham & Charters, 2007 ).

Formulating the research question(s) and objective(s): As a first step, members of the review team must appropriately justify the need for the review itself ( Petticrew & Roberts, 2006 ), identify the review’s main objective(s) ( Okoli & Schabram, 2010 ), and define the concepts or variables at the heart of their synthesis ( Cooper & Hedges, 2009 ; Webster & Watson, 2002 ). Importantly, they also need to articulate the research question(s) they propose to investigate ( Kitchenham & Charters, 2007 ). In this regard, we concur with Jesson, Matheson, and Lacey (2011) that clearly articulated research questions are key ingredients that guide the entire review methodology; they underscore the type of information that is needed, inform the search for and selection of relevant literature, and guide or orient the subsequent analysis. Searching the extant literature: The next step consists of searching the literature and making decisions about the suitability of material to be considered in the review ( Cooper, 1988 ). There exist three main coverage strategies. First, exhaustive coverage means an effort is made to be as comprehensive as possible in order to ensure that all relevant studies, published and unpublished, are included in the review and, thus, conclusions are based on this all-inclusive knowledge base. The second type of coverage consists of presenting materials that are representative of most other works in a given field or area. Often authors who adopt this strategy will search for relevant articles in a small number of top-tier journals in a field ( Paré et al., 2015 ). In the third strategy, the review team concentrates on prior works that have been central or pivotal to a particular topic. This may include empirical studies or conceptual papers that initiated a line of investigation, changed how problems or questions were framed, introduced new methods or concepts, or engendered important debate ( Cooper, 1988 ). Screening for inclusion: The following step consists of evaluating the applicability of the material identified in the preceding step ( Levy & Ellis, 2006 ; vom Brocke et al., 2009 ). Once a group of potential studies has been identified, members of the review team must screen them to determine their relevance ( Petticrew & Roberts, 2006 ). A set of predetermined rules provides a basis for including or excluding certain studies. This exercise requires a significant investment on the part of researchers, who must ensure enhanced objectivity and avoid biases or mistakes. As discussed later in this chapter, for certain types of reviews there must be at least two independent reviewers involved in the screening process and a procedure to resolve disagreements must also be in place ( Liberati et al., 2009 ; Shea et al., 2009 ). Assessing the quality of primary studies: In addition to screening material for inclusion, members of the review team may need to assess the scientific quality of the selected studies, that is, appraise the rigour of the research design and methods. Such formal assessment, which is usually conducted independently by at least two coders, helps members of the review team refine which studies to include in the final sample, determine whether or not the differences in quality may affect their conclusions, or guide how they analyze the data and interpret the findings ( Petticrew & Roberts, 2006 ). Ascribing quality scores to each primary study or considering through domain-based evaluations which study components have or have not been designed and executed appropriately makes it possible to reflect on the extent to which the selected study addresses possible biases and maximizes validity ( Shea et al., 2009 ). Extracting data: The following step involves gathering or extracting applicable information from each primary study included in the sample and deciding what is relevant to the problem of interest ( Cooper & Hedges, 2009 ). Indeed, the type of data that should be recorded mainly depends on the initial research questions ( Okoli & Schabram, 2010 ). However, important information may also be gathered about how, when, where and by whom the primary study was conducted, the research design and methods, or qualitative/quantitative results ( Cooper & Hedges, 2009 ). Analyzing and synthesizing data : As a final step, members of the review team must collate, summarize, aggregate, organize, and compare the evidence extracted from the included studies. The extracted data must be presented in a meaningful way that suggests a new contribution to the extant literature ( Jesson et al., 2011 ). Webster and Watson (2002) warn researchers that literature reviews should be much more than lists of papers and should provide a coherent lens to make sense of extant knowledge on a given topic. There exist several methods and techniques for synthesizing quantitative (e.g., frequency analysis, meta-analysis) and qualitative (e.g., grounded theory, narrative analysis, meta-ethnography) evidence ( Dixon-Woods, Agarwal, Jones, Young, & Sutton, 2005 ; Thomas & Harden, 2008 ).

9.3. Types of Review Articles and Brief Illustrations

EHealth researchers have at their disposal a number of approaches and methods for making sense out of existing literature, all with the purpose of casting current research findings into historical contexts or explaining contradictions that might exist among a set of primary research studies conducted on a particular topic. Our classification scheme is largely inspired from Paré and colleagues’ (2015) typology. Below we present and illustrate those review types that we feel are central to the growth and development of the eHealth domain.

9.3.1. Narrative Reviews

The narrative review is the “traditional” way of reviewing the extant literature and is skewed towards a qualitative interpretation of prior knowledge ( Sylvester et al., 2013 ). Put simply, a narrative review attempts to summarize or synthesize what has been written on a particular topic but does not seek generalization or cumulative knowledge from what is reviewed ( Davies, 2000 ; Green et al., 2006 ). Instead, the review team often undertakes the task of accumulating and synthesizing the literature to demonstrate the value of a particular point of view ( Baumeister & Leary, 1997 ). As such, reviewers may selectively ignore or limit the attention paid to certain studies in order to make a point. In this rather unsystematic approach, the selection of information from primary articles is subjective, lacks explicit criteria for inclusion and can lead to biased interpretations or inferences ( Green et al., 2006 ). There are several narrative reviews in the particular eHealth domain, as in all fields, which follow such an unstructured approach ( Silva et al., 2015 ; Paul et al., 2015 ).

Despite these criticisms, this type of review can be very useful in gathering together a volume of literature in a specific subject area and synthesizing it. As mentioned above, its primary purpose is to provide the reader with a comprehensive background for understanding current knowledge and highlighting the significance of new research ( Cronin et al., 2008 ). Faculty like to use narrative reviews in the classroom because they are often more up to date than textbooks, provide a single source for students to reference, and expose students to peer-reviewed literature ( Green et al., 2006 ). For researchers, narrative reviews can inspire research ideas by identifying gaps or inconsistencies in a body of knowledge, thus helping researchers to determine research questions or formulate hypotheses. Importantly, narrative reviews can also be used as educational articles to bring practitioners up to date with certain topics of issues ( Green et al., 2006 ).

Recently, there have been several efforts to introduce more rigour in narrative reviews that will elucidate common pitfalls and bring changes into their publication standards. Information systems researchers, among others, have contributed to advancing knowledge on how to structure a “traditional” review. For instance, Levy and Ellis (2006) proposed a generic framework for conducting such reviews. Their model follows the systematic data processing approach comprised of three steps, namely: (a) literature search and screening; (b) data extraction and analysis; and (c) writing the literature review. They provide detailed and very helpful instructions on how to conduct each step of the review process. As another methodological contribution, vom Brocke et al. (2009) offered a series of guidelines for conducting literature reviews, with a particular focus on how to search and extract the relevant body of knowledge. Last, Bandara, Miskon, and Fielt (2011) proposed a structured, predefined and tool-supported method to identify primary studies within a feasible scope, extract relevant content from identified articles, synthesize and analyze the findings, and effectively write and present the results of the literature review. We highly recommend that prospective authors of narrative reviews consult these useful sources before embarking on their work.

Darlow and Wen (2015) provide a good example of a highly structured narrative review in the eHealth field. These authors synthesized published articles that describe the development process of mobile health ( m-health ) interventions for patients’ cancer care self-management. As in most narrative reviews, the scope of the research questions being investigated is broad: (a) how development of these systems are carried out; (b) which methods are used to investigate these systems; and (c) what conclusions can be drawn as a result of the development of these systems. To provide clear answers to these questions, a literature search was conducted on six electronic databases and Google Scholar . The search was performed using several terms and free text words, combining them in an appropriate manner. Four inclusion and three exclusion criteria were utilized during the screening process. Both authors independently reviewed each of the identified articles to determine eligibility and extract study information. A flow diagram shows the number of studies identified, screened, and included or excluded at each stage of study selection. In terms of contributions, this review provides a series of practical recommendations for m-health intervention development.

9.3.2. Descriptive or Mapping Reviews

The primary goal of a descriptive review is to determine the extent to which a body of knowledge in a particular research topic reveals any interpretable pattern or trend with respect to pre-existing propositions, theories, methodologies or findings ( King & He, 2005 ; Paré et al., 2015 ). In contrast with narrative reviews, descriptive reviews follow a systematic and transparent procedure, including searching, screening and classifying studies ( Petersen, Vakkalanka, & Kuzniarz, 2015 ). Indeed, structured search methods are used to form a representative sample of a larger group of published works ( Paré et al., 2015 ). Further, authors of descriptive reviews extract from each study certain characteristics of interest, such as publication year, research methods, data collection techniques, and direction or strength of research outcomes (e.g., positive, negative, or non-significant) in the form of frequency analysis to produce quantitative results ( Sylvester et al., 2013 ). In essence, each study included in a descriptive review is treated as the unit of analysis and the published literature as a whole provides a database from which the authors attempt to identify any interpretable trends or draw overall conclusions about the merits of existing conceptualizations, propositions, methods or findings ( Paré et al., 2015 ). In doing so, a descriptive review may claim that its findings represent the state of the art in a particular domain ( King & He, 2005 ).

In the fields of health sciences and medical informatics, reviews that focus on examining the range, nature and evolution of a topic area are described by Anderson, Allen, Peckham, and Goodwin (2008) as mapping reviews . Like descriptive reviews, the research questions are generic and usually relate to publication patterns and trends. There is no preconceived plan to systematically review all of the literature although this can be done. Instead, researchers often present studies that are representative of most works published in a particular area and they consider a specific time frame to be mapped.

An example of this approach in the eHealth domain is offered by DeShazo, Lavallie, and Wolf (2009). The purpose of this descriptive or mapping review was to characterize publication trends in the medical informatics literature over a 20-year period (1987 to 2006). To achieve this ambitious objective, the authors performed a bibliometric analysis of medical informatics citations indexed in medline using publication trends, journal frequencies, impact factors, Medical Subject Headings (MeSH) term frequencies, and characteristics of citations. Findings revealed that there were over 77,000 medical informatics articles published during the covered period in numerous journals and that the average annual growth rate was 12%. The MeSH term analysis also suggested a strong interdisciplinary trend. Finally, average impact scores increased over time with two notable growth periods. Overall, patterns in research outputs that seem to characterize the historic trends and current components of the field of medical informatics suggest it may be a maturing discipline (DeShazo et al., 2009).

9.3.3. Scoping Reviews

Scoping reviews attempt to provide an initial indication of the potential size and nature of the extant literature on an emergent topic (Arksey & O’Malley, 2005; Daudt, van Mossel, & Scott, 2013 ; Levac, Colquhoun, & O’Brien, 2010). A scoping review may be conducted to examine the extent, range and nature of research activities in a particular area, determine the value of undertaking a full systematic review (discussed next), or identify research gaps in the extant literature ( Paré et al., 2015 ). In line with their main objective, scoping reviews usually conclude with the presentation of a detailed research agenda for future works along with potential implications for both practice and research.

Unlike narrative and descriptive reviews, the whole point of scoping the field is to be as comprehensive as possible, including grey literature (Arksey & O’Malley, 2005). Inclusion and exclusion criteria must be established to help researchers eliminate studies that are not aligned with the research questions. It is also recommended that at least two independent coders review abstracts yielded from the search strategy and then the full articles for study selection ( Daudt et al., 2013 ). The synthesized evidence from content or thematic analysis is relatively easy to present in tabular form (Arksey & O’Malley, 2005; Thomas & Harden, 2008 ).

One of the most highly cited scoping reviews in the eHealth domain was published by Archer, Fevrier-Thomas, Lokker, McKibbon, and Straus (2011) . These authors reviewed the existing literature on personal health record ( phr ) systems including design, functionality, implementation, applications, outcomes, and benefits. Seven databases were searched from 1985 to March 2010. Several search terms relating to phr s were used during this process. Two authors independently screened titles and abstracts to determine inclusion status. A second screen of full-text articles, again by two independent members of the research team, ensured that the studies described phr s. All in all, 130 articles met the criteria and their data were extracted manually into a database. The authors concluded that although there is a large amount of survey, observational, cohort/panel, and anecdotal evidence of phr benefits and satisfaction for patients, more research is needed to evaluate the results of phr implementations. Their in-depth analysis of the literature signalled that there is little solid evidence from randomized controlled trials or other studies through the use of phr s. Hence, they suggested that more research is needed that addresses the current lack of understanding of optimal functionality and usability of these systems, and how they can play a beneficial role in supporting patient self-management ( Archer et al., 2011 ).

9.3.4. Forms of Aggregative Reviews

Healthcare providers, practitioners, and policy-makers are nowadays overwhelmed with large volumes of information, including research-based evidence from numerous clinical trials and evaluation studies, assessing the effectiveness of health information technologies and interventions ( Ammenwerth & de Keizer, 2004 ; Deshazo et al., 2009 ). It is unrealistic to expect that all these disparate actors will have the time, skills, and necessary resources to identify the available evidence in the area of their expertise and consider it when making decisions. Systematic reviews that involve the rigorous application of scientific strategies aimed at limiting subjectivity and bias (i.e., systematic and random errors) can respond to this challenge.

Systematic reviews attempt to aggregate, appraise, and synthesize in a single source all empirical evidence that meet a set of previously specified eligibility criteria in order to answer a clearly formulated and often narrow research question on a particular topic of interest to support evidence-based practice ( Liberati et al., 2009 ). They adhere closely to explicit scientific principles ( Liberati et al., 2009 ) and rigorous methodological guidelines (Higgins & Green, 2008) aimed at reducing random and systematic errors that can lead to deviations from the truth in results or inferences. The use of explicit methods allows systematic reviews to aggregate a large body of research evidence, assess whether effects or relationships are in the same direction and of the same general magnitude, explain possible inconsistencies between study results, and determine the strength of the overall evidence for every outcome of interest based on the quality of included studies and the general consistency among them ( Cook, Mulrow, & Haynes, 1997 ). The main procedures of a systematic review involve:

• Formulating a review question and developing a search strategy based on explicit inclusion criteria for the identification of eligible studies (usually described in the context of a detailed review protocol).
• Searching for eligible studies using multiple databases and information sources, including grey literature sources, without any language restrictions.
• Selecting studies, extracting data, and assessing risk of bias in a duplicate manner using two independent reviewers to avoid random or systematic errors in the process.
• Analyzing data using quantitative or qualitative methods.
• Presenting results in summary of findings tables.
• Interpreting results and drawing conclusions.

Many systematic reviews, but not all, use statistical methods to combine the results of independent studies into a single quantitative estimate or summary effect size. Known as meta-analyses , these reviews use specific data extraction and statistical techniques (e.g., network, frequentist, or Bayesian meta-analyses) to calculate from each study by outcome of interest an effect size along with a confidence interval that reflects the degree of uncertainty behind the point estimate of effect ( Borenstein, Hedges, Higgins, & Rothstein, 2009 ; Deeks, Higgins, & Altman, 2008 ). Subsequently, they use fixed or random-effects analysis models to combine the results of the included studies, assess statistical heterogeneity, and calculate a weighted average of the effect estimates from the different studies, taking into account their sample sizes. The summary effect size is a value that reflects the average magnitude of the intervention effect for a particular outcome of interest or, more generally, the strength of a relationship between two variables across all studies included in the systematic review. By statistically combining data from multiple studies, meta-analyses can create more precise and reliable estimates of intervention effects than those derived from individual studies alone, when these are examined independently as discrete sources of information.

The review by Gurol-Urganci, de Jongh, Vodopivec-Jamsek, Atun, and Car (2013) on the effects of mobile phone messaging reminders for attendance at healthcare appointments is an illustrative example of a high-quality systematic review with meta-analysis. Missed appointments are a major cause of inefficiency in healthcare delivery with substantial monetary costs to health systems. These authors sought to assess whether mobile phone-based appointment reminders delivered through Short Message Service ( sms ) or Multimedia Messaging Service ( mms ) are effective in improving rates of patient attendance and reducing overall costs. To this end, they conducted a comprehensive search on multiple databases using highly sensitive search strategies without language or publication-type restrictions to identify all rct s that are eligible for inclusion. In order to minimize the risk of omitting eligible studies not captured by the original search, they supplemented all electronic searches with manual screening of trial registers and references contained in the included studies. Study selection, data extraction, and risk of bias assessments were performed inde­­pen­dently by two coders using standardized methods to ensure consistency and to eliminate potential errors. Findings from eight rct s involving 6,615 participants were pooled into meta-analyses to calculate the magnitude of effects that mobile text message reminders have on the rate of attendance at healthcare appointments compared to no reminders and phone call reminders.

Meta-analyses are regarded as powerful tools for deriving meaningful conclusions. However, there are situations in which it is neither reasonable nor appropriate to pool studies together using meta-analytic methods simply because there is extensive clinical heterogeneity between the included studies or variation in measurement tools, comparisons, or outcomes of interest. In these cases, systematic reviews can use qualitative synthesis methods such as vote counting, content analysis, classification schemes and tabulations, as an alternative approach to narratively synthesize the results of the independent studies included in the review. This form of review is known as qualitative systematic review.

A rigorous example of one such review in the eHealth domain is presented by Mickan, Atherton, Roberts, Heneghan, and Tilson (2014) on the use of handheld computers by healthcare professionals and their impact on access to information and clinical decision-making. In line with the methodological guide­lines for systematic reviews, these authors: (a) developed and registered with prospero ( www.crd.york.ac.uk/ prospero / ) an a priori review protocol; (b) conducted comprehensive searches for eligible studies using multiple databases and other supplementary strategies (e.g., forward searches); and (c) subsequently carried out study selection, data extraction, and risk of bias assessments in a duplicate manner to eliminate potential errors in the review process. Heterogeneity between the included studies in terms of reported outcomes and measures precluded the use of meta-analytic methods. To this end, the authors resorted to using narrative analysis and synthesis to describe the effectiveness of handheld computers on accessing information for clinical knowledge, adherence to safety and clinical quality guidelines, and diagnostic decision-making.

In recent years, the number of systematic reviews in the field of health informatics has increased considerably. Systematic reviews with discordant findings can cause great confusion and make it difficult for decision-makers to interpret the review-level evidence ( Moher, 2013 ). Therefore, there is a growing need for appraisal and synthesis of prior systematic reviews to ensure that decision-making is constantly informed by the best available accumulated evidence. Umbrella reviews , also known as overviews of systematic reviews, are tertiary types of evidence synthesis that aim to accomplish this; that is, they aim to compare and contrast findings from multiple systematic reviews and meta-analyses ( Becker & Oxman, 2008 ). Umbrella reviews generally adhere to the same principles and rigorous methodological guidelines used in systematic reviews. However, the unit of analysis in umbrella reviews is the systematic review rather than the primary study ( Becker & Oxman, 2008 ). Unlike systematic reviews that have a narrow focus of inquiry, umbrella reviews focus on broader research topics for which there are several potential interventions ( Smith, Devane, Begley, & Clarke, 2011 ). A recent umbrella review on the effects of home telemonitoring interventions for patients with heart failure critically appraised, compared, and synthesized evidence from 15 systematic reviews to investigate which types of home telemonitoring technologies and forms of interventions are more effective in reducing mortality and hospital admissions ( Kitsiou, Paré, & Jaana, 2015 ).

9.3.5. Realist Reviews

Realist reviews are theory-driven interpretative reviews developed to inform, enhance, or supplement conventional systematic reviews by making sense of heterogeneous evidence about complex interventions applied in diverse contexts in a way that informs policy decision-making ( Greenhalgh, Wong, Westhorp, & Pawson, 2011 ). They originated from criticisms of positivist systematic reviews which centre on their “simplistic” underlying assumptions ( Oates, 2011 ). As explained above, systematic reviews seek to identify causation. Such logic is appropriate for fields like medicine and education where findings of randomized controlled trials can be aggregated to see whether a new treatment or intervention does improve outcomes. However, many argue that it is not possible to establish such direct causal links between interventions and outcomes in fields such as social policy, management, and information systems where for any intervention there is unlikely to be a regular or consistent outcome ( Oates, 2011 ; Pawson, 2006 ; Rousseau, Manning, & Denyer, 2008 ).

To circumvent these limitations, Pawson, Greenhalgh, Harvey, and Walshe (2005) have proposed a new approach for synthesizing knowledge that seeks to unpack the mechanism of how “complex interventions” work in particular contexts. The basic research question — what works? — which is usually associated with systematic reviews changes to: what is it about this intervention that works, for whom, in what circumstances, in what respects and why? Realist reviews have no particular preference for either quantitative or qualitative evidence. As a theory-building approach, a realist review usually starts by articulating likely underlying mechanisms and then scrutinizes available evidence to find out whether and where these mechanisms are applicable ( Shepperd et al., 2009 ). Primary studies found in the extant literature are viewed as case studies which can test and modify the initial theories ( Rousseau et al., 2008 ).

The main objective pursued in the realist review conducted by Otte-Trojel, de Bont, Rundall, and van de Klundert (2014) was to examine how patient portals contribute to health service delivery and patient outcomes. The specific goals were to investigate how outcomes are produced and, most importantly, how variations in outcomes can be explained. The research team started with an exploratory review of background documents and research studies to identify ways in which patient portals may contribute to health service delivery and patient outcomes. The authors identified six main ways which represent “educated guesses” to be tested against the data in the evaluation studies. These studies were identified through a formal and systematic search in four databases between 2003 and 2013. Two members of the research team selected the articles using a pre-established list of inclusion and exclusion criteria and following a two-step procedure. The authors then extracted data from the selected articles and created several tables, one for each outcome category. They organized information to bring forward those mechanisms where patient portals contribute to outcomes and the variation in outcomes across different contexts.

9.3.6. Critical Reviews

Lastly, critical reviews aim to provide a critical evaluation and interpretive analysis of existing literature on a particular topic of interest to reveal strengths, weaknesses, contradictions, controversies, inconsistencies, and/or other important issues with respect to theories, hypotheses, research methods or results ( Baumeister & Leary, 1997 ; Kirkevold, 1997 ). Unlike other review types, critical reviews attempt to take a reflective account of the research that has been done in a particular area of interest, and assess its credibility by using appraisal instruments or critical interpretive methods. In this way, critical reviews attempt to constructively inform other scholars about the weaknesses of prior research and strengthen knowledge development by giving focus and direction to studies for further improvement ( Kirkevold, 1997 ).

Kitsiou, Paré, and Jaana (2013) provide an example of a critical review that assessed the methodological quality of prior systematic reviews of home telemonitoring studies for chronic patients. The authors conducted a comprehensive search on multiple databases to identify eligible reviews and subsequently used a validated instrument to conduct an in-depth quality appraisal. Results indicate that the majority of systematic reviews in this particular area suffer from important methodological flaws and biases that impair their internal validity and limit their usefulness for clinical and decision-making purposes. To this end, they provide a number of recommendations to strengthen knowledge development towards improving the design and execution of future reviews on home telemonitoring.

9.4. Summary

Table 9.1 outlines the main types of literature reviews that were described in the previous sub-sections and summarizes the main characteristics that distinguish one review type from another. It also includes key references to methodological guidelines and useful sources that can be used by eHealth scholars and researchers for planning and developing reviews.

Typology of Literature Reviews (adapted from Paré et al., 2015).

As shown in Table 9.1 , each review type addresses different kinds of research questions or objectives, which subsequently define and dictate the methods and approaches that need to be used to achieve the overarching goal(s) of the review. For example, in the case of narrative reviews, there is greater flexibility in searching and synthesizing articles ( Green et al., 2006 ). Researchers are often relatively free to use a diversity of approaches to search, identify, and select relevant scientific articles, describe their operational characteristics, present how the individual studies fit together, and formulate conclusions. On the other hand, systematic reviews are characterized by their high level of systematicity, rigour, and use of explicit methods, based on an “a priori” review plan that aims to minimize bias in the analysis and synthesis process (Higgins & Green, 2008). Some reviews are exploratory in nature (e.g., scoping/mapping reviews), whereas others may be conducted to discover patterns (e.g., descriptive reviews) or involve a synthesis approach that may include the critical analysis of prior research ( Paré et al., 2015 ). Hence, in order to select the most appropriate type of review, it is critical to know before embarking on a review project, why the research synthesis is conducted and what type of methods are best aligned with the pursued goals.

9.5. Concluding Remarks

In light of the increased use of evidence-based practice and research generating stronger evidence ( Grady et al., 2011 ; Lyden et al., 2013 ), review articles have become essential tools for summarizing, synthesizing, integrating or critically appraising prior knowledge in the eHealth field. As mentioned earlier, when rigorously conducted review articles represent powerful information sources for eHealth scholars and practitioners looking for state-of-the-art evidence. The typology of literature reviews we used herein will allow eHealth researchers, graduate students and practitioners to gain a better understanding of the similarities and differences between review types.

We must stress that this classification scheme does not privilege any specific type of review as being of higher quality than another ( Paré et al., 2015 ). As explained above, each type of review has its own strengths and limitations. Having said that, we realize that the methodological rigour of any review — be it qualitative, quantitative or mixed — is a critical aspect that should be considered seriously by prospective authors. In the present context, the notion of rigour refers to the reliability and validity of the review process described in section 9.2. For one thing, reliability is related to the reproducibility of the review process and steps, which is facilitated by a comprehensive documentation of the literature search process, extraction, coding and analysis performed in the review. Whether the search is comprehensive or not, whether it involves a methodical approach for data extraction and synthesis or not, it is important that the review documents in an explicit and transparent manner the steps and approach that were used in the process of its development. Next, validity characterizes the degree to which the review process was conducted appropriately. It goes beyond documentation and reflects decisions related to the selection of the sources, the search terms used, the period of time covered, the articles selected in the search, and the application of backward and forward searches ( vom Brocke et al., 2009 ). In short, the rigour of any review article is reflected by the explicitness of its methods (i.e., transparency) and the soundness of the approach used. We refer those interested in the concepts of rigour and quality to the work of Templier and Paré (2015) which offers a detailed set of methodological guidelines for conducting and evaluating various types of review articles.

To conclude, our main objective in this chapter was to demystify the various types of literature reviews that are central to the continuous development of the eHealth field. It is our hope that our descriptive account will serve as a valuable source for those conducting, evaluating or using reviews in this important and growing domain.

• Ammenwerth E., de Keizer N. An inventory of evaluation studies of information technology in health care. Trends in evaluation research, 1982-2002. International Journal of Medical Informatics. 2004; 44 (1):44–56. [ PubMed : 15778794 ]
• Anderson S., Allen P., Peckham S., Goodwin N. Asking the right questions: scoping studies in the commissioning of research on the organisation and delivery of health services. Health Research Policy and Systems. 2008; 6 (7):1–12. [ PMC free article : PMC2500008 ] [ PubMed : 18613961 ] [ CrossRef ]
• Archer N., Fevrier-Thomas U., Lokker C., McKibbon K. A., Straus S.E. Personal health records: a scoping review. Journal of American Medical Informatics Association. 2011; 18 (4):515–522. [ PMC free article : PMC3128401 ] [ PubMed : 21672914 ]
• Arksey H., O’Malley L. Scoping studies: towards a methodological framework. International Journal of Social Research Methodology. 2005; 8 (1):19–32.
• A systematic, tool-supported method for conducting literature reviews in information systems. Paper presented at the Proceedings of the 19th European Conference on Information Systems ( ecis 2011); June 9 to 11; Helsinki, Finland. 2011.
• Baumeister R. F., Leary M.R. Writing narrative literature reviews. Review of General Psychology. 1997; 1 (3):311–320.
• Becker L. A., Oxman A.D. In: Cochrane handbook for systematic reviews of interventions. Higgins J. P. T., Green S., editors. Hoboken, nj : John Wiley & Sons, Ltd; 2008. Overviews of reviews; pp. 607–631.
• Borenstein M., Hedges L., Higgins J., Rothstein H. Introduction to meta-analysis. Hoboken, nj : John Wiley & Sons Inc; 2009.
• Cook D. J., Mulrow C. D., Haynes B. Systematic reviews: Synthesis of best evidence for clinical decisions. Annals of Internal Medicine. 1997; 126 (5):376–380. [ PubMed : 9054282 ]
• Cooper H., Hedges L.V. In: The handbook of research synthesis and meta-analysis. 2nd ed. Cooper H., Hedges L. V., Valentine J. C., editors. New York: Russell Sage Foundation; 2009. Research synthesis as a scientific process; pp. 3–17.
• Cooper H. M. Organizing knowledge syntheses: A taxonomy of literature reviews. Knowledge in Society. 1988; 1 (1):104–126.
• Cronin P., Ryan F., Coughlan M. Undertaking a literature review: a step-by-step approach. British Journal of Nursing. 2008; 17 (1):38–43. [ PubMed : 18399395 ]
• Darlow S., Wen K.Y. Development testing of mobile health interventions for cancer patient self-management: A review. Health Informatics Journal. 2015 (online before print). [ PubMed : 25916831 ] [ CrossRef ]
• Daudt H. M., van Mossel C., Scott S.J. Enhancing the scoping study methodology: a large, inter-professional team’s experience with Arksey and O’Malley’s framework. bmc Medical Research Methodology. 2013; 13 :48. [ PMC free article : PMC3614526 ] [ PubMed : 23522333 ] [ CrossRef ]
• Davies P. The relevance of systematic reviews to educational policy and practice. Oxford Review of Education. 2000; 26 (3-4):365–378.
• Deeks J. J., Higgins J. P. T., Altman D.G. In: Cochrane handbook for systematic reviews of interventions. Higgins J. P. T., Green S., editors. Hoboken, nj : John Wiley & Sons, Ltd; 2008. Analysing data and undertaking meta-analyses; pp. 243–296.
• Deshazo J. P., Lavallie D. L., Wolf F.M. Publication trends in the medical informatics literature: 20 years of “Medical Informatics” in mesh . bmc Medical Informatics and Decision Making. 2009; 9 :7. [ PMC free article : PMC2652453 ] [ PubMed : 19159472 ] [ CrossRef ]
• Dixon-Woods M., Agarwal S., Jones D., Young B., Sutton A. Synthesising qualitative and quantitative evidence: a review of possible methods. Journal of Health Services Research and Policy. 2005; 10 (1):45–53. [ PubMed : 15667704 ]
• Finfgeld-Connett D., Johnson E.D. Literature search strategies for conducting knowledge-building and theory-generating qualitative systematic reviews. Journal of Advanced Nursing. 2013; 69 (1):194–204. [ PMC free article : PMC3424349 ] [ PubMed : 22591030 ]
• Grady B., Myers K. M., Nelson E. L., Belz N., Bennett L., Carnahan L. … Guidelines Working Group. Evidence-based practice for telemental health. Telemedicine Journal and E Health. 2011; 17 (2):131–148. [ PubMed : 21385026 ]
• Green B. N., Johnson C. D., Adams A. Writing narrative literature reviews for peer-reviewed journals: secrets of the trade. Journal of Chiropractic Medicine. 2006; 5 (3):101–117. [ PMC free article : PMC2647067 ] [ PubMed : 19674681 ]
• Greenhalgh T., Wong G., Westhorp G., Pawson R. Protocol–realist and meta-narrative evidence synthesis: evolving standards ( rameses ). bmc Medical Research Methodology. 2011; 11 :115. [ PMC free article : PMC3173389 ] [ PubMed : 21843376 ]
• Gurol-Urganci I., de Jongh T., Vodopivec-Jamsek V., Atun R., Car J. Mobile phone messaging reminders for attendance at healthcare appointments. Cochrane Database System Review. 2013; 12 cd 007458. [ PMC free article : PMC6485985 ] [ PubMed : 24310741 ] [ CrossRef ]
• Hart C. Doing a literature review: Releasing the social science research imagination. London: SAGE Publications; 1998.
• Higgins J. P. T., Green S., editors. Cochrane handbook for systematic reviews of interventions: Cochrane book series. Hoboken, nj : Wiley-Blackwell; 2008.
• Jesson J., Matheson L., Lacey F.M. Doing your literature review: traditional and systematic techniques. Los Angeles & London: SAGE Publications; 2011.
• King W. R., He J. Understanding the role and methods of meta-analysis in IS research. Communications of the Association for Information Systems. 2005; 16 :1.
• Kirkevold M. Integrative nursing research — an important strategy to further the development of nursing science and nursing practice. Journal of Advanced Nursing. 1997; 25 (5):977–984. [ PubMed : 9147203 ]
• Kitchenham B., Charters S. ebse Technical Report Version 2.3. Keele & Durham. uk : Keele University & University of Durham; 2007. Guidelines for performing systematic literature reviews in software engineering.
• Kitsiou S., Paré G., Jaana M. Systematic reviews and meta-analyses of home telemonitoring interventions for patients with chronic diseases: a critical assessment of their methodological quality. Journal of Medical Internet Research. 2013; 15 (7):e150. [ PMC free article : PMC3785977 ] [ PubMed : 23880072 ]
• Kitsiou S., Paré G., Jaana M. Effects of home telemonitoring interventions on patients with chronic heart failure: an overview of systematic reviews. Journal of Medical Internet Research. 2015; 17 (3):e63. [ PMC free article : PMC4376138 ] [ PubMed : 25768664 ]
• Levac D., Colquhoun H., O’Brien K. K. Scoping studies: advancing the methodology. Implementation Science. 2010; 5 (1):69. [ PMC free article : PMC2954944 ] [ PubMed : 20854677 ]
• Levy Y., Ellis T.J. A systems approach to conduct an effective literature review in support of information systems research. Informing Science. 2006; 9 :181–211.
• Liberati A., Altman D. G., Tetzlaff J., Mulrow C., Gøtzsche P. C., Ioannidis J. P. A. et al. Moher D. The prisma statement for reporting systematic reviews and meta-analyses of studies that evaluate health care interventions: Explanation and elaboration. Annals of Internal Medicine. 2009; 151 (4):W-65. [ PubMed : 19622512 ]
• Lyden J. R., Zickmund S. L., Bhargava T. D., Bryce C. L., Conroy M. B., Fischer G. S. et al. McTigue K. M. Implementing health information technology in a patient-centered manner: Patient experiences with an online evidence-based lifestyle intervention. Journal for Healthcare Quality. 2013; 35 (5):47–57. [ PubMed : 24004039 ]
• Mickan S., Atherton H., Roberts N. W., Heneghan C., Tilson J.K. Use of handheld computers in clinical practice: a systematic review. bmc Medical Informatics and Decision Making. 2014; 14 :56. [ PMC free article : PMC4099138 ] [ PubMed : 24998515 ]
• Moher D. The problem of duplicate systematic reviews. British Medical Journal. 2013; 347 (5040) [ PubMed : 23945367 ] [ CrossRef ]
• Montori V. M., Wilczynski N. L., Morgan D., Haynes R. B., Hedges T. Systematic reviews: a cross-sectional study of location and citation counts. bmc Medicine. 2003; 1 :2. [ PMC free article : PMC281591 ] [ PubMed : 14633274 ]
• Mulrow C. D. The medical review article: state of the science. Annals of Internal Medicine. 1987; 106 (3):485–488. [ PubMed : 3813259 ] [ CrossRef ]
• Evidence-based information systems: A decade later. Proceedings of the European Conference on Information Systems ; 2011. Retrieved from http://aisel ​.aisnet.org/cgi/viewcontent ​.cgi?article ​=1221&context ​=ecis2011 .
• Okoli C., Schabram K. A guide to conducting a systematic literature review of information systems research. ssrn Electronic Journal. 2010
• Otte-Trojel T., de Bont A., Rundall T. G., van de Klundert J. How outcomes are achieved through patient portals: a realist review. Journal of American Medical Informatics Association. 2014; 21 (4):751–757. [ PMC free article : PMC4078283 ] [ PubMed : 24503882 ]
• Paré G., Trudel M.-C., Jaana M., Kitsiou S. Synthesizing information systems knowledge: A typology of literature reviews. Information & Management. 2015; 52 (2):183–199.
• Patsopoulos N. A., Analatos A. A., Ioannidis J.P. A. Relative citation impact of various study designs in the health sciences. Journal of the American Medical Association. 2005; 293 (19):2362–2366. [ PubMed : 15900006 ]
• Paul M. M., Greene C. M., Newton-Dame R., Thorpe L. E., Perlman S. E., McVeigh K. H., Gourevitch M.N. The state of population health surveillance using electronic health records: A narrative review. Population Health Management. 2015; 18 (3):209–216. [ PubMed : 25608033 ]
• Pawson R. Evidence-based policy: a realist perspective. London: SAGE Publications; 2006.
• Pawson R., Greenhalgh T., Harvey G., Walshe K. Realist review—a new method of systematic review designed for complex policy interventions. Journal of Health Services Research & Policy. 2005; 10 (Suppl 1):21–34. [ PubMed : 16053581 ]
• Petersen K., Vakkalanka S., Kuzniarz L. Guidelines for conducting systematic mapping studies in software engineering: An update. Information and Software Technology. 2015; 64 :1–18.
• Petticrew M., Roberts H. Systematic reviews in the social sciences: A practical guide. Malden, ma : Blackwell Publishing Co; 2006.
• Rousseau D. M., Manning J., Denyer D. Evidence in management and organizational science: Assembling the field’s full weight of scientific knowledge through syntheses. The Academy of Management Annals. 2008; 2 (1):475–515.
• Rowe F. What literature review is not: diversity, boundaries and recommendations. European Journal of Information Systems. 2014; 23 (3):241–255.
• Shea B. J., Hamel C., Wells G. A., Bouter L. M., Kristjansson E., Grimshaw J. et al. Boers M. amstar is a reliable and valid measurement tool to assess the methodological quality of systematic reviews. Journal of Clinical Epidemiology. 2009; 62 (10):1013–1020. [ PubMed : 19230606 ]
• Shepperd S., Lewin S., Straus S., Clarke M., Eccles M. P., Fitzpatrick R. et al. Sheikh A. Can we systematically review studies that evaluate complex interventions? PLoS Medicine. 2009; 6 (8):e1000086. [ PMC free article : PMC2717209 ] [ PubMed : 19668360 ]
• Silva B. M., Rodrigues J. J., de la Torre Díez I., López-Coronado M., Saleem K. Mobile-health: A review of current state in 2015. Journal of Biomedical Informatics. 2015; 56 :265–272. [ PubMed : 26071682 ]
• Smith V., Devane D., Begley C., Clarke M. Methodology in conducting a systematic review of systematic reviews of healthcare interventions. bmc Medical Research Methodology. 2011; 11 (1):15. [ PMC free article : PMC3039637 ] [ PubMed : 21291558 ]
• Sylvester A., Tate M., Johnstone D. Beyond synthesis: re-presenting heterogeneous research literature. Behaviour & Information Technology. 2013; 32 (12):1199–1215.
• Templier M., Paré G. A framework for guiding and evaluating literature reviews. Communications of the Association for Information Systems. 2015; 37 (6):112–137.
• Thomas J., Harden A. Methods for the thematic synthesis of qualitative research in systematic reviews. bmc Medical Research Methodology. 2008; 8 (1):45. [ PMC free article : PMC2478656 ] [ PubMed : 18616818 ]
• Reconstructing the giant: on the importance of rigour in documenting the literature search process. Paper presented at the Proceedings of the 17th European Conference on Information Systems ( ecis 2009); Verona, Italy. 2009.
• Webster J., Watson R.T. Analyzing the past to prepare for the future: Writing a literature review. Management Information Systems Quarterly. 2002; 26 (2):11.
• Whitlock E. P., Lin J. S., Chou R., Shekelle P., Robinson K.A. Using existing systematic reviews in complex systematic reviews. Annals of Internal Medicine. 2008; 148 (10):776–782. [ PubMed : 18490690 ]

This publication is licensed under a Creative Commons License, Attribution-Noncommercial 4.0 International License (CC BY-NC 4.0): see https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc/4.0/

• Cite this Page Paré G, Kitsiou S. Chapter 9 Methods for Literature Reviews. In: Lau F, Kuziemsky C, editors. Handbook of eHealth Evaluation: An Evidence-based Approach [Internet]. Victoria (BC): University of Victoria; 2017 Feb 27.
• PDF version of this title (4.5M)
• Disable Glossary Links

In this Page

• Introduction
• Overview of the Literature Review Process and Steps
• Types of Review Articles and Brief Illustrations
• Concluding Remarks

Related information

• PMC PubMed Central citations
• PubMed Links to PubMed

Recent Activity

• Chapter 9 Methods for Literature Reviews - Handbook of eHealth Evaluation: An Ev... Chapter 9 Methods for Literature Reviews - Handbook of eHealth Evaluation: An Evidence-based Approach

Your browsing activity is empty.

Activity recording is turned off.

Turn recording back on

Connect with NLM

National Library of Medicine 8600 Rockville Pike Bethesda, MD 20894

Web Policies FOIA HHS Vulnerability Disclosure

Help Accessibility Careers

Ohio State nav bar

The Ohio State University

• BuckeyeLink
• Find People
• Search Ohio State

Literature Review, Theoretical Review or Conceptual Review?

I was researching and refreshing what I learned about literature reviews and research methodology in the 6625 ESLTECH class and came across this post in ResearchGate:

While  I was interested in finding out how to conduct a lit review,  and what methodologies fit with my “Begin With the End in mind” framework, I remembered that I was actually conducting a conceptual analysis of the Hackathon through two instruments:  the opportunistic interviews and my observations.  Applying Backward Design as research methodology has been used in the biological sciences.  It is called Backward Design for Education Research (BDER) and basically it instructs how to apply teaching-as-research (based on the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning(SoTL) model) to see what works in “providing evidence-based pedagogy and a deeper understanding of causal mechanisms for the broader education community.” (Jenkins, Bailey, Kummer & Weber, 2017). My approach was  more like “Backward Market Research,”  which consists of eight steps that ultimately resemble Wiggins and McTighe’s Backward Design for curriculum development. The key to backward market research lies in identifying the desired outcome (i.e., what data would answer the question you are asking) before embarking on the project …” (Jenkins, Bailey, Kummer & Weber, 2017). My question is broad  – what insights come out of the Hackathon – and the results are formative – data reports generate more questions and identify the need to code certain responses,  or to add a new question next year (as with the multitude of comments about Judging from 2017) – but a body or knowledge is being formed.

Synthesizing three decades of digital servitization: a systematic literature review and conceptual framework proposal

• Theoretical article
• Open access
• Published: 08 May 2024

Cite this article

You have full access to this open access article

• Pedro E. Minaya   ORCID: orcid.org/0000-0002-1179-9378 1 ,
• Lucía Avella   ORCID: orcid.org/0000-0003-2598-7318 2 &
• Juan A. Trespalacios   ORCID: orcid.org/0000-0003-0658-4038 2  

168 Accesses

Explore all metrics

This study, through a systematic literature review spanning 1990 to 2023, interrogates how servitization, and nowadays digital servitization, enhances manufacturing competitiveness. It introduces the DASOBI (Drivers, Actors, Strategies, Obstacles, Benefits, and Impact) framework for navigating the digital servitization transition, emphasizing strategic adaptability and technological alignment. Analysis of 157 articles reveals a significant increase in research, highlighting digital servitization’s role in competitive enhancement and customer engagement. The DASOBI framework offers manufacturers a novel approach for managing this transition, marking a unique contribution by distilling extensive literature into actionable insights for both theory and practice in the evolving field of digital servitization.

Similar content being viewed by others

How digital technologies reshape marketing: evidence from a qualitative investigation

Exploring Human Resource Management Digital Transformation in the Digital Age

The role of digitalization in business and management: a systematic literature review

Avoid common mistakes on your manuscript.

1 Introduction

1.1 context, motivation, and research topic.

In today’s dynamic manufacturing sector, companies are increasingly acknowledging the importance of complementing their product offerings with value-added services. This strategic shift, known as servitization—and more specifically digital servitization—marks a fundamental turn in the contemporary business paradigm. This transformation involves not only a shift from a product-centric to a service-centric focus but also a deep integration of advanced digital technologies. While considerable research has been conducted on individual aspects of servitization, a comprehensive analysis that encompasses all essential facets of this phenomenon, from its motivations to its final outcomes, remains relatively unexplored. This research proposal aims to develop a holistic conceptual framework that synthesizes and extends existing knowledge, thereby providing a more complete and nuanced understanding of digital servitization. This exhaustive review examines this evolving business model, highlighting its key benefits and challenges, its intersection with digital technologies, and its theoretical and practical implications.

The foundational premise, supported by Bustinza et al. ( 2015 ), suggests that manufacturing companies can achieve higher returns by offering services in conjunction with their products, a claim echoed in seminal works by Davies et al. ( 2007 ), Johnstone et al. ( 2009 ), Martín-Peña et al. ( 2017 ), and Leoni and Aria ( 2021 ). These services, ranging from maintenance and support to more sophisticated and customized solutions, expand the revenue streams of these firms. In this context, the contributions of Baines et al. ( 2007 ) and Neely et al. ( 2011 ) are pivotal, as they underscore how transitioning to a service-oriented market is driving strategic transformations in manufacturing firms, emphasizing value creation and differentiation in increasingly competitive markets (Brady et al. 2005 ).

The current market dynamics almost make this shift imperative. As noted by Sandström et al. ( 2008 ) and Tukker ( 2015 ), companies that limit their offerings to products alone face formidable challenges in maintaining profitability, driving them toward business model innovation that incorporates services into their product portfolios, as discussed in the literature by Gebauer and Fleisch ( 2007 ), Visnjic and Van Looy ( 2013 ), and Díaz-Garrido et al. ( 2018 ).

Servitization requires effective coordination among multiple stakeholders. Alghisi and Saccani ( 2015 ) address the critical importance of internal and external alignment, while Ayala et al. ( 2019 ) highlight the essential role of service providers in the successful adoption of servitization strategies. Moreover, Baines et al. ( 2011 ) and Lightfoot et al. ( 2013 ) explore how manufacturing firms can effectively integrate services into their product portfolio, emphasizing the importance of a strategically well-planned approach.

Beyond being a customer-facing strategy, the internal benefits are equally compelling. As delineated by Kamp and Alcalde ( 2014 ), servitization facilitates process optimization and extends the lifespan of machinery. These advantages are further enhanced with the incorporation of digital technologies, particularly in the era of Industry 4.0 (Kamp and Perry 2017 ). This digital servitization, explored in studies by Lee et al. ( 2014 ), Kans and Ingwald ( 2016 ), and Paiola and Gebauer ( 2020 ), offers an enhanced layer of value, encompassing innovative goods and services.

Researchers such as Favoretto et al. ( 2022 ) and Rabetino et al. ( 2023 ) have elucidated how technological advancements act as catalysts for developing differentiated products and services, thereby enhancing competitiveness (Müller et al. 2021 ). This leads to the formulation of hybrid business models, termed Product-Service Systems (PSS), which are economically, socially, and environmentally sustainable. This PSS model provides a more holistic solution, meeting specific customer needs beyond just providing functional products (Barquet et al. 2013 ).

In this process, a demand for specific organizational and technological capabilities is identified. Coreynen et al. ( 2017 ) and Schroeder et al. ( 2022 ) have pinpointed the importance of organizational structure and technological capabilities, particularly in the context of digitalization, as key factors for a successful transition to digital servitization (Parida et al. 2014 ; Kanninen et al. 2017 ).

Implementing servitization, as highlighted by Mathieu ( 2001 ) and Yu and Sung ( 2023 ), is not without its challenges, ranging from internal organizational resistance to external factors, such as customer reluctance. Brax ( 2005 ) and Benedettini et al. ( 2015 ) provide a comprehensive analysis of these risks, emphasizing the importance of effective management to navigate potential obstacles in achieving successful servitization (Windahl and Lakemond 2006 ; Pessôa and Becker 2017 ). The process demands a well-structured and strategically informed approach, incorporating both business and customer perspectives. Proper implementation of servitization can lead to substantial benefits, as demonstrated by Baines et al. ( 2009b , 2017 ) and Wang et al. ( 2018 ), highlighting its potential for long-term value creation (Brady et al. 2005 ).

The phenomenon of servitization, particularly in its digital form, has emerged as a prominent area of study, characterized by its complexity and multidimensionality. Academic literature has thoroughly explored this concept, from underlying motivations to implementation strategies, examining both inherent challenges and potential benefits (Raddats et al. 2016 ; Rabetino et al. 2021 ).

1.2 Research gap

Despite the extensive body of knowledge on servitization amassed by previous studies, there remains a discernible gap characterized by fragmented examinations rather than a consolidated analytical approach. This study pinpoints a need for a unified framework that can effectively guide servitization strategies, addressing this lacuna as a pivotal area for forthcoming research (Calabrese et al. 2019 ; Kohtamäki et al. 2020a ). The advent of the digital era has precipitated transformative shifts, underscoring the servitization concept—the transition from purely selling products to offering integrated product-service solutions. Nevertheless, the interaction between servitization and digital technologies, a realm referred to as digital servitization, remains a relatively uncharted territory. This area lacks a systematic and thorough review spanning the last three decades. This omission highlights the imperative need for an in-depth understanding of how servitization has evolved and the essential development of a framework to adeptly navigate the intricacies involved in implementing these strategies effectively.

1.3 Methodology proposed

To address the identified research gap, our study employs a comprehensive, multi-phased methodology structured as follows: Initially, we conduct an in-depth examination of the literature on servitization and digital servitization. This phase aims to develop an integrative theoretical framework that captures the evolution of servitization over the past three decades, emphasizing the shift toward digital service delivery within the manufacturing sector. Subsequently, the study undertakes a systematic literature review to classify the existing body of work. This review specifically focuses on selecting pertinent studies that encompass both traditional and digital servitization, aiming to identify trends, patterns, and existing research gaps. Following the review, we perform a detailed analysis of the selected articles to explore how various aspects of servitization and digital servitization interact and influence each other. In the final phase, we synthesize the findings from the study to deepen the conceptual understanding of the servitization phenomenon, including its digital components. This synthesis will provide valuable insights into effectively managing the transition toward servitization and digital servitization, highlighting its practical applicability in a business context.

1.4 Expected contributions

The primary goal of this research is to construct an integrative framework that captures the evolution, current state, and future trajectory of servitization and digital servitization. This framework will delineate both the theoretical underpinnings and practical ramifications of servitization, illuminating the challenges and opportunities that have surfaced. Particularly, it will explore the transformative influence of Industry 4.0 technologies—such as the Internet of Things, Big Data analytics, and Artificial Intelligence—on traditional servitization models, steering them toward more advanced digital practices. This examination is crucial for understanding how digital technologies can enhance the competitiveness and value proposition of manufacturing firms engaged in servitization.

The overarching aim of this study is to deepen the comprehension of servitization by exploring its interplay with digitalization, thus broadening its theoretical and managerial relevance. The research intends to offer an integrated perspective that not only advances the academic discourse in this field but also aids manufacturing companies in adeptly navigating the complexities of servitization and digital servitization. Furthermore, this review will articulate a roadmap for manufacturers considering this transition, conceptually enriching a domain that, despite its increasing importance, remains underexplored in scholarly research. By highlighting the enduring interest in adopting servitization correctly and underscoring the necessity for a unified theoretical framework, this study responds to calls for theoretical consolidation and a more comprehensive research agenda (Pettigrew 1988 ; Pye and Pettigrew 2005 ).

In summary, our proposed study aims to provide a detailed analysis that integrates insights from various studies into a cohesive narrative, with a particular focus on the servitization and digital servitization processes within the manufacturing sector. This synthesis will significantly contribute to both academic knowledge and practical applications, emphasizing the complex and evolving nature of servitization in manufacturing, and marking a key conclusion of this thorough examination.

2 Research aims

This study is dedicated to a comprehensive analysis of the servitization phenomenon and its progression toward digital servitization within the manufacturing sector, meticulously examining the most significant research from the past 30 years. The aim is to understand the development and various applications of servitization, along with the challenges and obstacles it entails. The study seeks to identify the motivations driving companies toward servitization, examine the various actors involved in the process and their interplay, and explore the strategies necessary for successful implementation. Furthermore, the organizational and technological capabilities required for transitioning to servitization will be analyzed, as well as the associated risks and challenges, including both internal and external hurdles that companies must overcome to reap the potential benefits of servitization. This analysis is guided by key research in the field (Zhang and Banerji 2017 ; Khanra et al. 2021 ) offering a comprehensive perspective on this significant shift in business dynamics within the manufacturing sector.

Essentially, this study seeks to answer the main research question: To what extent do servitization and digital servitization provide benefits that contribute to enhancing a company’s competitiveness? Alongside this primary question, the study intends to address the following aspects related to the development of servitization and digital servitization:

RQ1. Implementation of a digital servitization strategy. How it should be affected by the company’s business environment? How it should be the co-creation process in an international context? Which new knowledge and new skills need to be developed to be implemented correctly? Which benefits can be obtained by implementing the digital enablers of Industry 4.0? Which changes could it involve in the internal structure of the business? Which changes could it involve in the company’s business environment (relations with suppliers or strategic partners)? How could it face the challenges and obstacles that arise during the transition process?

RQ2. Benefits of developing an effective digital servitization strategy. How it provides greater value to the customer? How can product customization be optimized? How it encourages access to new markets? How it promotes gaining new customers? How it allows innovation in ideas or business models? How it allows the development of goods with novel services? How it effectively allows greater returns to be achieved? How it improves competitiveness?

The focus of this study is not only on analyzing servitization as a strategic shift for manufacturing companies but also on exploring how the integration of digital technologies can enrich and complicate this process. Additionally, the aim is to synthesize existing knowledge to provide a broader and more nuanced understanding of digital servitization, highlighting its key advantages, challenges, and intersection with digital technologies.

Four stages were established for this systematic literature review (Tranfield et al. 2003 ), one for each of the four phases outlined in the first section.

This collection focuses on four fields of research: business administration, marketing, operations management, and administration of services. The studies from the two main databases were examined: Web of Science and Scopus, as they are considered reference sources for the topic being analyzed. Once the information was screened, the most-cited studies were selected, which formed the basis for the present study.

3.1 Review process

In conducting a systematic literature review to gain a profound understanding of servitization and digital servitization within the manufacturing sector, our approach integrated multiple rigorous methodologies (Thomé et al. 2016 ). Initially, following the method proposed by Hertzberg and Rudner ( 1999 ), we conducted a meticulous keyword search in the Web of Science and Scopus databases, aiming to identify pertinent literature using terms like “servitization,” “digital servitization,” and their variants. This was instrumental in capturing the subject’s breadth and depth, allowing for the creation of search strings using the Boolean connector OR. The search strings were incorporated in titles, abstracts, and/or keywords, adhering to the time span of 1990 to 2023 in major databases, thus fulfilling the guidelines set by Tranfield et al. ( 2003 ) for inclusion criteria.

To further refine the search and ensure a robust database, we applied additional parameters and restrictions post-establishing the primary search strings for both databases. We limited our search to open access and hybrid gold journals, focusing on high-quality, readily available research outputs. Additionally, we set a citation threshold to include articles with significant field impact, thereby ensuring the inclusion of seminal works and recent influential studies. This strategy was pivotal in developing a comprehensive, relevant collection of literature, ensuring the inclusion of the most pertinent works in the field of digital servitization.

The approach was enhanced by strictly adhering to three key inclusion criteria: (a) considering publications from 1990 to 2023, to ensure a contemporary and comprehensive review, (b) prioritizing articles from prestigious academic journals within the relevant study areas, thus ensuring source quality and relevance, and (c) selecting articles focusing explicitly on key aspects of servitization and digital servitization. This approach, aligned with the study’s objectives and research questions, ensures a holistic and detailed understanding of the phenomenon, accurately reflecting the dynamics and transformations in the manufacturing sector.

The present study aimed to answer the research question and the various related questions. This was done via the PRISMA method (Preferred Reporting Items for Systemic Reviews and Meta-Analyses). The selection criteria produced 647 articles (from Web of Science) and 630 articles (from Scopus). Once identified, the abstracts of each article were read to screen and select only those in line with the fourth study phase: to help properly understand the concept, how it is managed, and how it is applied. 157 articles were ultimately identified that met all of the inclusion criteria. Figure  1 outlines the PRISMA method used.

Source: Authors’ own work from Web of Science and Scopus databases

Flow diagram, based on the PRISMA Method, for the selection of relevant documents for the systematic literature review.

3.2 Descriptive analysis

Figure 2 offers an analytical synthesis of the publication trends within the realms of servitization and digital servitization over a span of more than three decades, utilizing data harvested from the Web of Science and Scopus databases. The blue bars across all three charts articulate the volume of literature pertaining to servitization, encompassing its theoretical underpinnings, industry applications, and cross-disciplinary studies. This scholarly corpus embodies the foundational and evolutionary aspects of servitization as a strategic paradigm shift in manufacturing and service industries.

Source: Web of Science and Scopus databases and authors’ own work

Evolution of publications on Servitization and Digital Servitization (1990–2023).

In parallel, the orange bars specifically chart the trajectory of literature focused on digital servitization. This subset of research delves into the intricacies of embedding digital technologies within traditional servitization frameworks. It illuminates the burgeoning intersection of digital innovation and service strategies, reflecting a vibrant and rapidly advancing frontier of research.

The upward trend of both blue and orange bars in the separate charts for Web of Science and Scopus indicates a robust increase in scholarly output. This not only testifies to the growing academic and practical significance of servitization concepts but also their digital counterparts, which are pivotal in today’s technology-driven marketplaces.

The application of inclusion and exclusion criteria to the study of servitization and digital servitization clarifies the focus of academic research, emphasizing the most relevant and impactful studies in these areas. This refined approach highlights the critical and emerging conversations shaping the future of manufacturing industries through servitization and its digital augmentation. The graph reflects the scholarly community’s increasing investment in understanding these concepts and their application, suggesting a dual focus: the persistent importance of servitization in strengthening the interplay between manufacturing and services, and the transformative potential of digital technologies within this framework. Serving both as a retrospective and a forecast, the visualization indicates key areas for future research that promise to advance industrial practices and academic thought.

Regarding the countries in which the identified studies have been carried out, the visual data presented in Fig.  3 captures a comprehensive view of the global research output on servitization and digital servitization from 1990 to 2023, as indexed by the Web of Science and Scopus databases and further refined by the application of inclusion and exclusion criteria. The top section, shown in blue, delineates the Web of Science data, indicating a prominent concentration of scholarly activity within certain countries, possibly linked to their robust research infrastructures, funding provisions, or strong manufacturing sectors that are conducive to studies in servitization.

Source: Web of Science and Scopus databases

Number of publications by country on Servitization and Digital Servitization (1990–2023).

The middle section, in orange, portrays the Scopus data, revealing a parallel distribution pattern to that of the Web of Science but with slight variances that may be indicative of the different regional research emphases or variations in the databases’ indexing methodologies. The countries with the highest volume of publications are recognized as potential centers of excellence and innovation in the field of servitization.

The bottom section of the graph, in green, represents the distilled essence of this academic output following the application of the inclusion and exclusion criteria. This section emphasizes the refined and concentrated scholarly work that aligns more closely with the specific nuances and requirements of servitization and digital servitization research as defined by the study. It presents a narrower but more focused spectrum of publications, suggesting a curated body of knowledge that serves as a critical resource for understanding the current state and future directions of servitization in the manufacturing sector.

Together, these three segments of Fig.  3 not only illustrate the quantitative aspects of the research output but also underscore the qualitative focus and depth of scholarly exploration achieved through rigorous selection. This tripartite analysis offers a lens through which to view the international dissemination and development of knowledge in servitization and digital servitization, highlighting established leaders in the field as well as regions with the potential for increased research activity, international collaboration, and contribution to the servitization discourse.

In Fig.  4 , the Web of Science data (represented by the blue graph) lists Oscar Bustinza as the author with the highest number of publications, closely followed by Marko Kohtamäki and Vinit Parida. In contrast, the Scopus data (illustrated by the orange graph) also positions Vinit Parida prominently, yet Marko Kohtamäki’s publication count is lower than that reported in the Web of Science, presenting a notable discrepancy.

Number of publications by author on Servitization and Digital Servitization (1990–2023).

When the inclusion and exclusion criteria are applied (as shown in the green graph), there is a decrease in the number of publications, which aligns with expectations, given that these criteria aim to omit publications failing to meet the predetermined standards of quality and relevance. Following this filtration, Tim Baines emerges as the author with the most publications, indicating the significant relevance of his research work to the focused aims of this systematic literature review. Consequently, the filtration process underscores those authors whose contributions are particularly central or foundational to the field.

The comparison across the three graphs demonstrates the influence of database selection and methodological rigor on the perceived prominence of authors within the academic community. This analysis goes beyond merely highlighting the leading figures in servitization research; it underscores the importance of thorough evaluation in literature reviews to identify research of substantial impact.

Thus, the filtration process distinctly recognizes authors whose contributions are considered pivotal to the discipline.

Figure  5 provides a succinct overview of journal publication volumes on servitization and digital servitization from 1990 to 2023, based on data from Web of Science and Scopus databases. Prior to applying inclusion and exclusion criteria, the journals listed in the Web of Science (blue) and Scopus (orange) indicate a diverse quantity of publications.

Number of publication volume in journals with the highest frequency of articles on Servitization and Digital Servitization (1990–2023).

Post-application (green), the data are refined to highlight the top ten journals that are most aligned with the research criteria. It is noteworthy that the application of these criteria significantly alters the landscape of the considered literature. Some journals that initially (in the Web of Science or Scopus databases) had a high volume of publications appear to have fewer articles meeting the requirements, which may reflect on the specificity and relevance of their contributions to the field.

The graphic serves as an insightful metric of the research landscape, indicating not only the journals that are most prolific in the domain but also the robustness of articles surviving rigorous scholarly scrutiny. This visual representation is integral to the academic discourse, as it not only informs researchers of the core journals within the field but also reflects the evolving standards and focal areas within the literature on servitization and digital servitization.

The descriptive analyses included in this section serve as a pivotal foundation for the authors’ elaboration, shedding light on the trajectory of academic inquiry into servitization and digital servitization. It encapsulates the dual analysis conducted using the Web of Science and Scopus databases and the meticulous selection process leading to the corpus of papers employed in the systematic literature review. The synthesis of these findings offers valuable insights into the progression of research in this domain, indicating a maturing yet dynamically expanding field of study.

3.3 Classification process

Upon identifying studies that met the established selection criteria, a thorough examination of each was conducted to categorize them according to specific themes. These encompassed the motivations driving companies toward servitization, namely the reasons why manufacturers transition from producing solely goods to combining these with services, including the anticipated benefits of such a transformation. The various actors involved in the servitization process and the nature of their interactions were scrutinized, as well as the strategies necessary for successful implementation, which entailed identifying potential needs for external partners, commonly service providers (Martínez et al. 2010 ; Bastl et al. 2012 ; Spring and Araujo 2013 ; Ziaee et al. 2018 ). The types of services commonly offered were analyzed, categorized as basic, intermediate, or advanced, along with the specific servitization strategies adopted by the companies. Furthermore, the study delved into the organizational and technological capabilities required for an effective transition to servitization (Momeni et al. 2023 ), as well as the potential risks and challenges arising in these transition processes, including both internal and external obstacles that must be overcome to fully capitalize on the potential benefits of servitization (Raddats et al. 2017 ; Reim et al. 2019 ; Minaya et al. 2023 ).

4 Results: theoretical background

4.1 from servitization to digital servitization.

The concept of servitization, which has significantly evolved over the years, has achieved solid recognition in both the academic and industrial spheres. Initially defined by Levitt ( 1972 ) and Vandermerwe and Rada ( 1988 ) as the process of adding value through services (Johnson and Mena 2008 ; Baines et al. 2011 ; Lindman et al. 2016 ; Ruiz-Martín and Díaz-Garrido 2021 ), servitization has expanded to encompass multiple strategic objectives, such as competitive advantage (Baines et al. 2009a ; Raddats et al. 2019 ), financial goals, and marketing benefits (Khanra et al. 2021 ).

The shift toward servitization entails a redefinition of traditional business models, focusing on innovation (Sandström et al. 2008 ; Martín-Peña et al. 2018 ; Qi et al. 2020 ; Xing et al. 2023 ), and transforming manufacturers into service-centric companies (Cusumano 2008 ; Santamaría et al. 2012 ; Mosch et al. 2021 ). In this regard, manufacturing companies are fundamentally reorienting their business models and operational strategies to include value-added services (Gebauer and Kowalkowski 2012 ; Hyun and Kim 2021 ). Baines and Lightfoot ( 2013 ) and Luoto et al. ( 2017 ) highlight the widespread changes this implies in management, marketing, and operations. The change is so substantial that over 50% of a company’s activities and personnel can be involved in providing these newly implemented services, as indicated by multiple studies cited by Martín-Peña and Ziaee ( 2016 ). This is because research has shown that servitization not only adds value but also increases profitability with relatively low asset investments (Davies et al. 2007 ; Kharlamov and Parry 2021 ).

The types of services offered range from basic to advanced (Gebauer et al. 2013 ; Kindström and Kowalkowski 2014 ; Sousa and Da Silveira 2017 ), with advanced services contributing to greater profitability (Eggert et al. 2014 ) and generating higher customer satisfaction (Mont 2002 ; Ostrom et al. 2010 ), leading to improved competitive positioning (Oliva and Kallenberg 2003 ; Durugbo 2014 ). Baines et al. ( 2011 ) argue that servitization involves creating distinctive and sustainable capabilities (Raddats 2011 ; Kimita et al. 2022 ), requiring not just the provision of goods, but also the innovation of value through added services (Tukker and Tischner 2006 ; García Martín et al. 2019 ; Zighan and Abualqumboz 2022 ), enabling companies to maintain their competitive edge (Tuli et al. 2007 ; Brax and Jonsson 2009 ; Nordin and Kowalkowski 2010 ).

While the goal of servitization is to enrich product offerings and drive competitiveness (Neely et al. 2011 ; Gaiardelli et al. 2014 ; Benedettini et al. 2015 ), companies must avoid the “service paradox,” where the focus on new services undermines existing production capabilities (Gebauer et al. 2005 ; Hyun and Kim 2021 ). To this end, various researchers advocate for a comprehensive analysis covering customer needs, pricing strategies, delivery infrastructure, and organizational change (Manzini and Vezzoli 2003 ; Kohtamäki and Partanen 2016 ; Ziaee et al. 2017 ). In summary, moving away from product-centric thinking and engaging in product and servitization logic.

In this context, Santamaría et al. ( 2012 ) and Rabetino et al. ( 2017 ) underscore three fundamental considerations for a successful servitization strategy: the content, process, and context of organizational change. This involves determining what to change, how to change, and why the change is necessary (Kreye et al. 2015 ).

The complexity of servitization also demands internal and external alignments within companies (Gebauer 2008 ; Alghisi and Saccani 2015 ; Kohtamäki et al. 2019a ; Zhang et al. 2023 ). Internally, this involves harmonizing the organization’s strategy with the service portfolio and aligning this strategy throughout the organization (Oliva and Kallenberg 2003 ; Yan et al. 2020 ). Externally, alignment extends to the service provider network and customer expectations (Ceci and Masini 2011 ; Paiola et al. 2013 ). Similarly, servitization applies in B2B and B2C domains, serving as a differentiator and pathway to future alliances and customer loyalty (Baines et al. 2017 ; Pombo and Franco 2023 ).

On the other hand, technological advancements act as significant facilitators in the transition toward servitization, particularly the digital elements of Industry 4.0 (Dalenogare et al. 2018 ; Paschou et al. 2020 ; Opazo-Basáez et al. 2021 ; Tian et al. 2022 ; Le-Dain et al. 2023 ). This involves both internal and external organizational changes, focusing on disruptive innovations and addressing legal and financial challenges (Bustinza et al. 2018 ; Tronvoll et al. 2020 ; Kolagar et al. 2022 ), leading to what is known as digital servitization.

Digital servitization represents the integration of enabling technologies from Industry 4.0 into the servitization process, generating additional benefits and creating value for the customer (Ibarra et al. 2018 ; Grandinetti et al. 2020 ; Ciasullo et al. 2021 ; Bettiol et al. 2022 ). This digital transformation expands the scope of traditional services, allowing for greater customization and efficiency (Frank et al. 2019 ; Chen et al. 2021 ).

Digitalization facilitates data collection and analysis, improving decision-making, and enabling more predictive and proactive services (Lee et al. 2014 ; Chen et al. 2022a ; Rakic et al. 2022 ). Moreover, data-based digital capabilities are fundamental for the success of digital servitization, as they enhance both product support services and customer support services (Chen et al. 2023 ).

Digital servitization also promotes value co-creation and collaboration among manufacturers, suppliers, and customers, optimizing service delivery and strengthening relationships (Coreynen et al. 2017 ; Vendrell-Herrero et al. 2017 ; Kohtamäki et al. 2020b ; Sjödin et al. 2020 ). The business models of digital servitization are also influenced by Industry 4.0 technologies, such as Internet of Things and Big Data, enabling the development of more integrated and customer-centric solutions (Naik et al. 2020 ; Bortoluzzi et al. 2022 ; Minaya et al.  2023 ).

Furthermore, an integral aspect of the servitization landscape, especially in the digital era, is the evolution of Product-Service Systems (PSS). PSS represents a strategic approach that shifts the focus from selling products to offering a combination of products and services designed to fulfill specific customer needs more efficiently (Tukker and Tischner 2006 ; Baines et al. 2017 ). This transition to PSS reflects a broader industry movement toward sustainable and customer-centric business models, where the value proposition extends beyond the physical product to include personalized services. The advent of Industry 4.0 technologies has further propelled this evolution, leading to the development of Smart PSS. Smart PSS integrates digital technologies, such as the Internet of Things, Big Data, and Artificial Intelligence to enhance service delivery, improve customer experience and enable new forms of value creation (Chowdhury et al. 2018 ; Bortoluzzi et al. 2022 ). The adoption of these advanced technologies within PSS frameworks represents a significant leap in how companies’ approach servitization, allowing for greater customization, efficiency, and proactive engagement with customers. Therefore, understanding the role and impact of PSS, particularly Smart PSS, is crucial for comprehending the full scope of digital servitization and its implications for future business strategies.

4.2 Integrating smart product-service systems (smart PSS) into digital servitization: evolution, challenges, and opportunities

Product-Service Systems (PSS) epitomize an evolution in business models, integrating goods and services to fulfill customer needs sustainably and effectively (Galbraith 2002 ; Gebauer et al. 2011 ; Oliveira et al. 2015 ; Haase et al. 2017 ; Gaiardelli et al. 2021 ; Zhou and Song 2021 ). Tukker ( 2004 ) categorizes PSS into product oriented, use oriented, and result oriented, with each type offering distinct benefits, such as improved profit margins and differentiation from competitors (Tukker and Tischner 2006 ; Reim et al. 2015 ; Baines et al. 2017 ; Rabetino et al. 2017 ). Service-oriented PSS prioritize personalized customer experiences, requiring greater customer involvement (Matthyssens and Vandenbempt 2010 ; Cusumano et al. 2014 ; Zighan and Abualqumboz 2022 ).

The advent of Industry 4.0 technologies has given rise to Smart PSS, enhancing traditional PSS frameworks with digital capabilities and aligning with digital servitization’s goals to maximize customer value and competitive advantage (Chowdhury et al. 2018 ; Zheng et al. 2019 ; Wang et al. 2021 ; Bortoluzzi et al. 2022 ; Chen et al. 2023 ). Smart PSS incorporate Internet of Things, Big Data, and Artificial Intelligence to offer tailored services and predictive maintenance, thus improving product reliability and customer experience. However, transitioning to Smart PSS necessitates overcoming internal challenges, such as developing digital capabilities and adapting organizational culture, and external challenges like aligning strategies with customer and supplier expectations (Alghisi and Saccani 2015 ; Baines and Shi 2015 ; Ceci and Masini 2011 ; Mosch et al. 2021 ).

Business models in the context of Smart PSS vary from product centered to service oriented, depending on the company’s servitization maturity and technological capacity, leading to greater competitive differentiation and new market opportunities (Kowalkowski et al. 2017 ; Zheng et al. 2019 ; Baines et al. 2020 ; Chen et al. 2021 ). Implementing Smart PSS calls for a holistic approach, from strategic planning to system design and operational management, with a focus on how digital capabilities enhance PSS offerings and the overall value chain (Coreynen et al. 2017 ; Zheng et al. 2018 ).

In sum, the transition from traditional servitization to digital servitization, through the deployment of Smart PSS, marks a critical shift in value creation and sustaining customer loyalty, propelled by Industry 4.0 innovations (Vandermerwe and Rada 1988 ; Frank et al. 2019 ; Pinillos et al. 2022 ; Raddats et al. 2022 ; Schroeder et al. 2022 ; Chen et al. 2023 ; Martín-Peña et al. 2023 ). Realizing the potential of digital servitization demands an understanding of technological capabilities, fostering innovation, and market adaptability (Kohtamäki et al. 2019b ; Zhang et al. 2023 ). Successful digital servitization and Smart PSS rely on integrating technology with strategic vision and customer centricity, cultivating a business model focused on collaboration, innovation, and value co-creation (Naik et al. 2020 ; Chen et al. 2021 ; Zhou et al. 2021 ; Kolagar et al. 2022 ).

4.3 Digital servitization: crafting superior value in the modern era

As previously noted, servitization, as it evolves into digital servitization, catalyzes a profound and strategic transformation of business models and operational paradigms, emphasizing the importance of both internal and external strategic alignments. This process not only optimizes existing service offerings but also unlocks significant potential for service innovation and market competitiveness. Specifically, the integration of advanced technologies in digital servitization allows companies to create superior and customized value for their customers. This expanded value creation is achieved through a synergistic combination of technological resources and human capabilities, facilitating more predictive, personalized, and proactive services. Thus, digital servitization emerges as an essential and transformative step in business strategy, driving not only efficiency and strategic alignment but also fostering innovation and strengthening competitive positioning in the market.

Digital servitization, a contemporary evolution of traditional servitization, integrates Industry 4.0 technologies into the service domain, creating significant value for the customer. This value manifests in several key dimensions, all driven by digitalization and the emerging capabilities it offers.

Enhanced personalization and customer experience. The ability to collect and analyze large volumes of data using digital technologies enables companies to better understand the needs and preferences of their customers (Tao and Qi 2017 ; Chen et al. 2023 ). This leads to the creation of more personalized service offerings, tailored specifically to individual customer requirements. For instance, data analytics capabilities enhance servitization by enabling service personalization, which is fundamental for improving customer satisfaction and fostering long-term loyalty (Chen et al. 2022b ).

Efficiency and proactivity in service delivery. Digital servitization allows companies to be more efficient and proactive in delivering services. Technologies like the Internet of Things and Artificial Intelligence facilitate remote monitoring and predictive maintenance, anticipating problems before they occur and minimizing downtime (Lee et al. 2014 ; Tao and Qi 2017 ; Raddats et al. 2022 ). This not only improves product reliability but also reduces costs for the customer.

Creation of new opportunities and business models. The integration of digital services opens new avenues for innovative business models. For example, companies can offer usage-based solutions or subscriptions, where customers pay for performance or outcomes rather than the product itself (Vendrell-Herrero et al. 2017 ; Martín-Peña et al. 2020 ; Bortoluzzi et al. 2022 ). This can result in greater flexibility and more attractive cost options for the customer.

Enhanced customer–supplier relationships. Digital servitization fosters greater collaboration and value co-creation between suppliers and customers (Coreynen et al. 2017 ; Sjödin et al. 2020 ; Harrmann et al. 2023 ). This is because digital capabilities enable smoother communication and more transparent information exchange, resulting in stronger and more reliable relationships (Davies et al. 2023 ).

Continuous improvement of products and services. Ongoing feedback and data analysis enable continuous improvement of the products and services offered. Companies can quickly adjust their offerings in response to customer feedback or market changes, ensuring that their services remain relevant and of high quality (Chen et al. 2021 ).

Access to new markets. Digital servitization enables companies to access new markets and customer segments. By offering digital solutions, companies can overcome geographical and logistical barriers, reaching customers who were previously inaccessible (Münch et al. 2022 ; Rakic et al. 2022 ).

In summary, digital servitization not only enhances existing service offerings but also opens new opportunities for service innovation, strategic alignment, and market competitiveness. Its successful implementation is key to creating substantial value for the customer, highlighting the importance of a well-planned and executed strategy in the context of modern servitization.

5 Proposed conceptual framework: guiding the transition to digital servitization

Digital servitization represents a pivotal shift in the business landscape, where manufacturing companies evolve into providers of comprehensive solutions that seamlessly integrate products and services, augmented by digital technologies. This transformation is driven by the need for enhanced competitiveness, customer engagement, and value creation in a rapidly changing digital economy.

The development of our DASOBI conceptual framework, designed to guide the transition to digital servitization, is grounded in a rigorous methodological approach, underpinned by a comprehensive systematic literature review. This review meticulously synthesized three decades of academic research and industry insights, incorporating a total of 157 articles. Our comprehensive review process involved a deep analysis of the most influential and relevant publications in the field, among which notable contributions include Alghisi and Saccani ( 2015 ); Ayala et al. ( 2017 , 2019 ); Coreynen et al. ( 2017 ); Tao and Qi ( 2017 ); Vendrell-Herrero et al. ( 2017 ); Bustinza et al. ( 2018 ); Frank et al. ( 2019 ); Baines et al. ( 2020 ); Martín-Peña et al. ( 2020 ); Naik et al. ( 2020 ); Brax et al. ( 2021 ); Gaiardelli et al. ( 2021 ); Kohtamäki et al. ( 2021 ); Bettiol et al. ( 2022 ); Bortoluzzi et al. ( 2022 ); Marcon et al. ( 2022 ); Münch et al. ( 2022 ); Brekke et al. ( 2023 ); Chen et al. ( 2023 ); Chirumalla et al. ( 2023 ); Shen et al. ( 2023 ). These articles were particularly significant for identifying emerging trends, key challenges, and effective strategies in digital servitization. By systematically analyzing this extensive body of literature, we identified critical themes, challenges, strategies, and outcomes associated with the digital servitization journey. This analysis not only highlighted the multifaceted nature of digital servitization but also emphasized the critical importance of aligning strategic considerations, technological capabilities, and stakeholder roles to successfully navigate this complex transition. The structured framework presented herein not only reflects the evolution of the field but also provides clear guidance for manufacturing companies advancing toward more sophisticated and digitalized servitization practices.

The DASOBI framework, while empirically grounded in a comprehensive literature review, also draws extensively on classical and emerging theories to provide a robust theoretical foundation. For instance, diffusion of innovations theory (Rogers 2003 ) elucidates the “Drivers” and “Obstacles” in the adoption of digital servitization by explaining the rate and process through which new technological innovations spread within industries. Furthermore, the resource-based view (Barney 1991 ) is instrumental in understanding the “Strategies” component of the framework, emphasizing the importance of internal capabilities and resources in gaining a competitive advantage through digital transformation. These theoretical integrations not only enhance the academic rigor of our framework but also offer a deeper understanding of the multifaceted nature of digital servitization.

Therefore, the proposed DASOBI (Drivers, Actors, Strategies, Obstacles, Benefits, and Impact) model emerges as a synthesis of empirical evidence and theoretical insights, designed to offer a coherent and actionable guide for organizations seeking to embrace digital servitization.

This conceptual framework delineates a roadmap for organizations to navigate this complex transition. The framework identifies the core components essential for a successful journey toward digital servitization:

Underlying reasons for the shift (Drivers). Recognizing the strategic imperatives for transitioning toward a digital servitization model is critical. This includes understanding market dynamics, competitive pressures, and technological advancements driving this change.

Key actors involved (Actors). Successful digital servitization necessitates the involvement and alignment of various stakeholders, including internal teams, customers, technology partners, and suppliers. Their roles, expectations, and contributions are pivotal in shaping the servitization journey.

Strategic considerations and tools (Strategies). This encompasses adopting strategic frameworks, methodologies, and digital tools that are conducive to servitization. These tools and strategies should facilitate the integration of digital technologies with traditional product-service offerings, ensuring a seamless transition.

Potential challenges and obstacles (Obstacles). Identifying and addressing challenges such as cultural resistance, skill gaps, technological complexities, and integration issues with existing processes is crucial. Proactive strategies and contingency plans are essential to mitigate these barriers.

Anticipated benefits of the transition (Benefits). The transition to digital servitization should bring about significant benefits, including enhanced customer value, increased revenue streams, and improved competitive positioning. This component focuses on quantifying these benefits and aligning them with organizational goals.

Expected outcomes and impact (Impact). The final component of the framework revolves around the tangible outcomes and impacts of digital servitization. This includes enhanced customer satisfaction, increased market share, and improved operational efficiency.

In the digital servitization framework, the transition toward digital servitization, driven by market dynamics, competitive pressures, and technological advancements, is intrinsically linked to the roles and contributions of key stakeholders, such as internal teams, customers, and technology partners. Strategic considerations and tools must be selected in light of potential challenges, like cultural resistance and skill gaps, ensuring alignment with stakeholder capabilities and expectations for a seamless integration of digital technologies with traditional offerings. This strategic alignment is pivotal in overcoming obstacles and realizing anticipated benefits, such as enhanced customer value and competitive positioning. These benefits, in turn, lead to tangible outcomes, like improved customer satisfaction and operational efficiency, which feedback into the market, influencing ongoing strategic imperatives and shaping the evolution of digital servitization strategies. This dynamic interplay highlights a continuous feedback loop where outcomes inform underlying reasons, reinforcing the need for adaptability and strategic foresight in the digital servitization journey.

The contribution of the DASOBI framework to the existing literature is manifold. By synthesizing empirical findings with theoretical insights from servitization and digital transformation research, this framework addresses identified gaps, such as the integration of digital technologies in traditional servitization models and the management of organizational changes associated with such transitions (Baines and Lightfoot 2013 ; Vargo and Lusch 2008 ). Specifically, the DASOBI framework aids in conceptualizing how companies can strategically navigate the complexities of digital servitization, providing a structured approach that is missing in previous studies. This not only extends the theoretical discourse around servitization but also sets a foundation for future research to explore the dynamic interactions between digital technologies and service strategies in manufacturing sectors.

In conclusion, this conceptual framework serves as a comprehensive guide for firms embarking on the digital servitization journey. It provides a structured approach to understanding and implementing the necessary changes, ensuring a smooth transition and realization of the potential benefits of digital servitization. Figure  6 summarizes this meticulously formulated model (DASOBI), referred to as the Drivers (underlying reasons for the shift), Actors (key actors involved), Strategies (strategic considerations and tools), Obstacles (potential challenges and obstacles), Benefits (anticipated benefits of the transition), and Impact (expected outcomes and impact) of Digital Servitization Strategy, offers a robust framework for scholarly exploration, grounded in an exhaustive review of extant literature.

Source: Authors’ own work

Conceptual theoretical model for the analysis of Digital Servitization.

The DASOBI framework orchestrates the shift from traditional service strategies to digitally-enhanced service offerings, underpinned by the alignment of core elements: Drivers, Actors, Strategy, Obstacles, Benefits, and Impact. The model emphasizes a strategic approach, incorporating digital catalytic factors to augment adaptability, customer-centric analytics, and the pursuit of novel revenue streams through digital innovations.

Within this framework, the digital knowledge and capability development are crucial. Firms must harness Big Data to distill customer insights, leverage Artificial Intelligence for identifying opportunities, and increase the flexibility of their service offerings via digital platforms. The role of digital service providers is pivotal, offering expertise to mitigate transition risks, assure service quality, and bolster productivity with cutting-edge technological solutions.

However, the shift is not without its challenges. The resistance to digital transformation and the complexity of measuring profitability in the digital service landscape can impede progress. Moreover, the implications of Industry 4.0 are profound, necessitating organizational restructuring, workforce upskilling, and technological investments to realize the potential of digital servitization.

The anticipated benefits of this digital shift are manifold. Enhanced customer understanding through sophisticated data analytics, improved market positioning through digital innovation, and elevated creative capability with advanced technology are but a few of the advantages. Furthermore, embracing Industry 4.0 technologies within digital servitization amplifies these benefits, leading to superior product quality via smart manufacturing, greater adaptability in production, and increased operational efficiency ensuring timely delivery.

In summary, the DASOBI model meticulously integrates the transition to digital servitization with the digital economy’s imperatives, presenting a coherent roadmap for firms aspiring to harness the full spectrum of benefits offered by Industry 4.0 innovations.

6 Conclusions, limitations, and further research

This study embarked on an exhaustive journey through three decades of literature on servitization and its evolution toward digital servitization within the manufacturing sector. Through a systematic literature review, we explored the strategic transformation that involves integrating advanced services and digital technologies into product offerings, a change driven by the need to enhance competitiveness, customer engagement, and value creation in a rapidly evolving digital economy.

Our research findings have identified key drivers, actors, strategies, challenges, and benefits associated with the transition toward digital servitization. The DASOBI conceptual framework tries to provide a structured guide for understanding and managing this complex transition. This framework emphasizes the importance of recognizing the underlying reasons for adopting digital servitization models, the necessity of aligning and collaborating with diverse stakeholders, and the use of specific strategies to overcome the inherent challenges of this process.

Despite this study’s contribution to the body of knowledge on digital servitization, we acknowledge several limitations. The geographical concentration of the research activity analyzed might limit the generalizability of our findings across diverse cultural and economic contexts. The rapid evolution of digital technologies and business models also suggests that the relevance of our discoveries could be challenged by future developments. Additionally, our research focused primarily on manufacturing firms, which limits the applicability of the findings to other sectors.

These limitations open several avenues for future research. It is imperative to validate and test the generalizability of the DASOBI framework across various organizational and industry contexts. Further research is also needed to develop specific metrics that can measure the impacts of digital servitization. Longitudinal studies could provide a deeper understanding of how servitization strategies influence business outcomes over time.

This study contributes to the academic discussion by clarifying and deepening the concept of servitization and its intersection with digitalization, offering an integrative view that can assist manufacturing firms in navigating the complex landscape of servitization and digital servitization. Although we have tried to establish a solid foundation for future research, it is evident that the field of digital servitization remains dynamic and evolving, requiring ongoing examination to fully comprehend its impact on business strategy and practice.

Data availability

The datasets generated during and/or analyzed during the current study are available from the corresponding author on reasonable request.

Alghisi A, Saccani N (2015) Internal and external alignment in the servitization journey—overcoming the challenges. Prod Plann Control 26:1219–1232. https://doi.org/10.1080/09537287.2015.1033496

Article   Google Scholar  

Ayala NF, Paslauski CA, Ghezzi A, Frank AG (2017) Knowledge sharing dynamics in service suppliers’ involvement for servitization of manufacturing companies. Int J Prod Econ 193:538–553. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2017.08.019

Ayala NF, Gerstlberger W, Frank AG (2019) Managing servitization in product companies: the moderating role of service suppliers. Int J Oper Prod Manag 39(1):43–74. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-08-2017-0484

Baines T, Lightfoot H (2013) Servitization of the manufacturing firm: exploring the operations practices and technologies that deliver advanced services. Int J Oper Prod Manag 34(1):2–35. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-02-2012-0086

Baines T, Shi VG (2015) A Delphi study to explore the adoption of servitization in UK companies. Prod Plann Control 26:1171–1187. https://doi.org/10.1080/09537287.2015.1033490

Baines T, Lightfoot HW, Evans S, Neely A et al (2007) State-of-the-art in product-service systems. J Eng Manuf 221(10):1543–1552. https://doi.org/10.1243/09544054JEM858

Baines T, Lightfoot H, Benedettini O, Kay JM (2009a) The servitization of manufacturing: a review of literature and reflection on future challenges. J Manuf Technol Manag 20(5):547–567. https://doi.org/10.1108/17410380910960984

Baines T, Lightfoot H, Peppard J, Johnson M et al (2009b) Towards an operations strategy for product-centric servitization. Int J Oper Prod Manag 29(5):494–519. https://doi.org/10.1108/01443570910953603

Baines T, Lightfoot H, Smart P (2011) Servitization within manufacturing: exploring the provision of advanced services and their impact on vertical integration. J Manuf Technol Manag 22(7):947–954. https://doi.org/10.1108/17410381111160988

Baines T, Ziaee Bigdeli A, Bustinza OF, Shi VG et al (2017) Servitization: revisiting the state-of-the-art and research priorities. Int J Oper Prod Manag 37(2):256–278. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-06-2015-0312

Baines T, Ziaee Bigdeli A, Sousa R, Schroeder A (2020) Framing the servitization transformation process: a model to understand and facilitate the servitization journey. Int J Prod Econ 221:1–44. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2019.07.036

Barney J (1991) Firm resources and sustained competitive advantage. J Manag 17(1):99–120

Google Scholar  

Barquet APB, De Oliveira MG, Amigo CR, Cunha VP, Rozenfeld H (2013) Employing the business model concept to support the adoption of product-service systems (PSS). Ind Mark Manag 42(5):693–704. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2013.05.003

Bastl M, Johnson M, Lightfoot H, Evans S (2012) Buyer-supplier relationships in a servitized environment. Int J Oper Prod Manag 32(6):650–675. https://doi.org/10.1108/01443571211230916

Benedettini O, Neely A, Swink M (2015) Why do servitized firms fail? A risk-based explanation. Int J Oper Prod Manag 35(6):946–979. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-02-2014-0052

Bettiol M, Capestro M, Di Maria E, Micelli S (2022) Overcoming pandemic challenges through product innovation: the role of digital technologies and servitization. Eur Manag J 40(5):707–717. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.emj.2022.05.003

Bortoluzzi G, Chiarvesio M, Romanello R, Tabacco R, Veglio V (2022) Servitisation and performance in the business-to-business context: the moderating role of Industry 4.0 technologies. J Manuf Technol Manag 33(9):108–128. https://doi.org/10.1108/JMTM-08-2021-0317

Brady T, Davies A, Gann D (2005) Creating value by delivering integrated solutions. Int J Proj Manag 23(5):360–365. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijproman.2005.01.001

Brax SA (2005) A manufacturer becoming service provider—challenges and a paradox. Manag Serv Qual 15(2):142–155. https://doi.org/10.1108/09604520510585334

Brax SA, Jonsson K (2009) Developing integrated solution offerings for remote diagnostics: a comparative case study of two manufacturers. Int J Oper Prod Manag 29(5):539–560. https://doi.org/10.1108/01443570910953621

Brax SA, Calabrese A, Levialdi Ghiron N, Tiburzi L, Gronroos C (2021) Explaining the servitization paradox: a configurational theory and a performance measurement framework. Int J Oper Prod Manag 41(5):517–546. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-08-2020-0535

Brekke T, Lenka S, Kohtamaki M, Parida V, Solem BAA (2023) Overcoming barriers to transformation in manufacturing firms. A path-dependence perspective of digital servitization. Rev Manag Sci. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11846-023-00641-0

Bustinza OF, Bigdeli AZ, Baines T, Elliot C (2015) Servitization and competitive advantage: the importance of organizational structure and value chain position. Res Technol Manag 58:53–60. https://doi.org/10.5437/08956308X5805354

Bustinza OF, Gomes E, Vendrell-Herrero F, Tarba SY (2018) An organizational change framework for digital servitization: evidence from the Veneto region. Strateg Change 27:111–119. https://doi.org/10.1002/jsc.2186

Calabrese A, Levialdi Ghiron N, Tiburzi L, Baines T, Ziaee Bigdeli A (2019) The measurement of degree of servitization: literature review and recommendations. Prod Plann Control 30:1118–1135. https://doi.org/10.1080/09537287.2019.1592260

Ceci F, Masini A (2011) Balancing specialized and generic capabilities in the provision of integrated solutions. Ind Corp Change 20(1):91–131. https://doi.org/10.1093/icc/dtq069

Chen Y, Visnjic I, Parida V, Zhang Z (2021) On the road to digital servitization—the (dis)continuous interplay between business model and digital technology. Int J Oper Prod Manag 41(5):694–722. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-08-2020-0544

Chen M, Pu X, Zhang M, Cai Z et al (2022a) Data analytics capability and servitization: the moderated mediation role of bricolage and innovation orientation. Int J Oper Prod Manag 42(4):440–470. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-10-2021-0663

Chen Y, Wu Z, Yi W, Wang B et al (2022b) Bibliometric method for manufacturing servitization: a review and future research directions. Sustainability 14:1–26. https://doi.org/10.3390/su14148743

Chen L, Dai Y, Ren F, Dong X (2023) Data-driven digital capabilities enable servitization strategy—from service supporting the product to service supporting the client. Technol Forecast Soc Change 197:1–15. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.techfore.2023.122901

Chirumalla K, Leoni L, Oghazi P (2023) Moving from servitization to digital servitization: identifying the required dynamic capabilities and related microfoundations to facilitate the transition. J Bus Res 158:1–23. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2023.113668

Chowdhury S, Haftor D, Pashkevich N (2018) Smart product-service systems (Smart PSS) in industrial firms: a literature review. Procedia CIRP 73:26–31. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procir.2018.03.333

Ciasullo MV, Polese F, Montera R, Carrubbo L (2021) A digital servitization framework for viable manufacturing companies. J Bus Ind Mark 36(13):142–160. https://doi.org/10.1108/JBIM-07-2020-0349

Coreynen W, Matthyssens P, Van Bockhaven W (2017) Boosting servitization through digitization: pathways and dynamic resource configurations for manufacturers. Ind Mark Manag 60:42–53. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2016.04.012

Cusumano MA (2008) The changing software business: moving from products to services. Computer 41:20–27. https://doi.org/10.1109/MC.2008.29

Cusumano MA, Kahl SJ, Suárez FF (2014) Services, industry evolution, and the competitive strategies of product firms. Strateg Manag J 36:559–575. https://doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.2378868

Dalenogare LS, Benitez GB, Ayala NF, Frank AG (2018) The expected contribution of Industry 4.0 technologies for industrial performance. Int J Prod Econ 204:383–394. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2018.08.019

Davies A, Brady T, Hobday M (2007) Organizing for solutions: systems seller vs. systems integrator. Ind Mark Manag 36(2):183–193. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2006.04.009

Davies P, Bustinza OF, Parry G, Jovanovic M (2023) Unpacking the relationship between digital capabilities, services capabilities, and firm financial performance: a moderated mediation model. Ind Mark Manag 115:1–10. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2023.09.005

Díaz-Garrido E, Pinillos MJ, Soriano-Pinar I, García-Magro C (2018) Changes in the intellectual basis of servitization research: a dynamic analysis. J Eng Technol Manag JET M 48:1–14. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jengtecman.2018.01.005

Durugbo C (2014) Strategic framework for industrial product-service co-design: findings from the microsystems industry. Int J Prod Res 52:2881–2900. https://doi.org/10.1080/00207543.2013.857054

Eggert A, Hogreve J, Ulaga W, Muenkhoff E (2014) Revenue and profit implications of industrial service strategies. J Serv Res 17:23–39. https://doi.org/10.1177/1094670513485823

Favoretto C, Mendes G, Oliveira M, Cauchick-Miguel P, Coreynen W (2022) From servitization to digital servitization: how digitalization transforms companies’ transition towards services. Ind Mark Manag 102:104–121. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2022.01.003

Frank AG, Mendes GHS, Ayala NF, Ghezzi A (2019) Servitization and Industry 4.0 convergence in the digital transformation of product firms: a business model innovation perspective. Technol Forecast Soc Change 141:341–351. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.techfore.2019.01.014

Gaiardelli P, Songini L, Saccani N (2014) The automotive industry: heading towards servitization in turbulent times. Servitization in Industry. Springer, Cham

Gaiardelli P, Pezzotta G, Rondini A, Romero D et al (2021) Product-service systems evolution in the era of Industry 4.0. Serv Bus 15:177–207. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11628-021-00438-9

Galbraith JR (2002) Organizing to deliver solutions. Organ Dyn 31(2):194–207. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0090-2616(02)00101-8

García Martin PC, Schroeder A, Bigdeli AZ (2019) The value architecture of servitization: expanding the research scope. J Bus Res 104:438–449. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2019.04.010

Gebauer H (2008) Identifying service strategies in product manufacturing companies by exploring environment—strategy configurations. Ind Mark Manage 37(3):278–291. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2007.05.018

Gebauer H, Fleisch E (2007) An investigation of the relationship between behavioral processes, motivation, investments in the service business and service revenue. Ind Mark Manag 36(3):337–348. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2005.09.005

Gebauer H, Kowalkowski C (2012) Customer-focused and service-focused orientation in organizational structures. J Bus Ind Mark 27(7):527–537. https://doi.org/10.1108/08858621211257293

Gebauer H, Elgar F, Thomas F (2005) Overcoming the service paradox in manufacturing companies. Eur Manag J 23:14–26. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.emj.2004.12.006

Gebauer H, Gustafsson A, Witell L (2011) Competitive advantage through service differentiation by manufacturing companies. J Bus Res 64(12):1270–1280. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2011.01.015

Gebauer H, Paiola M, Saccani N (2013) Characterizing service networks for moving from products to solutions. Ind Mark Manag 42:31–46. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2012.11.002

Grandinetti R, Ciasullo MV, Paiola M, Schiavone F (2020) Fourth industrial revolution, digital servitization and relationship quality in Italian B2B manufacturing firms. Explor Study TQM J 32(4):647–671. https://doi.org/10.1108/TQM-01-2020-0006

Haase RP, Pigosso DCA, McAloone TC (2017) Product/service-system origins and trajectories: a systematic literature review of PSS definitions and their characteristics. Procedia CIRP 64:157–162. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procir.2017.03.053

Harrmann LK, Eggert A, Böhm E (2023) Digital technology usage as a driver of servitization paths in manufacturing industries. Eur J Mark 57(3):834–857. https://doi.org/10.1108/EJM-11-2021-0914

Hertzberg S, Rudner L (1999) Quality of researchers’ searches of the ERIC database. Educ Policy Anal Arch. https://doi.org/10.14507/epaa.v7n25.1999

Hyun M, Kim J (2021) Challenge or opportunity? A case of tire rental servitization from financial and channel perspectives. Serv Bus 15:1–17. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11628-020-00433-6

Ibarra D, Ganzarain J, Igartua JI (2018) Business model innovation through Industry 4.0: a review. Procedia Manuf 22:4–10. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PROMFG.2018.03.002

Johnson M, Mena C (2008) Supply chain management for servitised products: a multi-industry case study. Int J Prod Econ 114:27–39. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2007.09.011

Johnstone S, Dainty A, Wilkinson A (2009) Integrating products and services through life: an aerospace experience. Int J Oper Prod Manag 29(5):520–538. https://doi.org/10.1108/01443570910953612

Kamp B, Alcalde H (2014) Servitization in the basque economy. Strateg Change 23:359–374. https://doi.org/10.1002/jsc.1982

Kamp B, Parry G (2017) Servitization and advanced business services as levers for competitiveness. Ind Mark Manag 60:11–16. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2016.12.008

Kanninen T, Penttinen E, Tinnilä M, Kaario K (2017) Exploring the dynamic capabilities required for servitization: the case process industry. Bus Process Manag J 23(2):226–247. https://doi.org/10.1108/BPMJ-03-2015-0036

Kans M, Ingwald A (2016) Business model development towards service management 4.0. Procedia CIRP 47:489–494. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.PROCIR.2016.03.228

Khanra S, Dhir A, Parida V, Kohtamäki M (2021) Servitization research: a review and bibliometric analysis of past achievements and future promises. J Bus Res 131:151–166. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2021.03.056

Kharlamov AA, Parry G (2021) The impact of servitization and digitization on productivity and profitability of the firm: a systematic approach. Prod Plann Control 32:185–197. https://doi.org/10.1080/09537287.2020.1718793

Kimita K, McAloone T, Ogata K, Pigosso D (2022) Servitization maturity model: developing distinctive capabilities for successful servitization in manufacturing companies. J Manuf Technol Manag 33(9):61–87. https://doi.org/10.1108/JMTM-07-2021-0248

Kindström D, Kowalkowski C (2014) Service innovation in product-centric firms: a multidimensional business model perspective. J Bus Ind Mark 29(2):96–111. https://doi.org/10.1108/JBIM-08-2013-0165

Kohtamaki M, Henneberg SC, Martinez V, Kimita K, Gebauer H (2019a) A configurational approach to servitization: review and research directions. Serv Sci 11(3):1–29. https://doi.org/10.1287/serv.2019.0245

Kohtamaki M, Rabetino R, Einola S, Parida V, Patel P (2021) Unfolding the digital servitization path from products to product-service-software systems: practicing change through intentional narratives. J Bus Res 137:379–392. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2021.08.027

Kohtamäki M, Partanen J (2016) Co-creating value from knowledge-intensive business services in manufacturing firms: the moderating role of relationship learning in supplier-customer interactions. J Bus Res 69(7):2498–2506. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2016.02.019

Kohtamäki M, Parida V, Oghazi P, Gebauer H, Baines T (2019b) Digital servitization business models in ecosystems: a theory of the firm. J Bus Res 104:380–392. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2019.06.027

Kohtamäki M, Einola S, Rabetino R (2020a) Exploring servitization through the paradox lens: coping practices in servitization. Int J Prod Econ 226:1–15. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2020.107619

Kohtamäki M, Parida V, Patel P, Gebauer H (2020b) The relationship between digitalization and servitization: the role of servitization in capturing the financial potential of digitalization. Technol Forecast Soc Change 151:1–35. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.techfore.2019.119804

Kolagar M, Parida V, Sjödin D (2022) Ecosystem transformation for digital servitization: a systematic review, integrative framework, and future research agenda. J Bus Res 146:176–200. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2022.03.067

Kowalkowski C, Gebauer H, Kamp B, Parry G (2017) Servitization and deservitization: overview, concepts, and definitions. Ind Mark Manag 60:4–10. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2016.12.007

Kreye ME, Roehrich JK, Lewis MA (2015) Servitizing manufacturers: the impact of service complexity and contractual and relational capabilities. Prod Plann Control 26:1233–1246. https://doi.org/10.1080/09537287.2015.1033489

Le-Dain MA, Benhayoun L, Matthews J, Liard M (2023) Barriers and opportunities of digital servitization for SMEs: the effect of smart product-service system business models. Serv Bus 17:359–393. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11628-023-00520-4

Lee J, Kao HA, Yang S (2014) Service innovation and smart analytics for Industry 4.0 and big data environment. Procedia CIRP 16:3–8. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procir.2014.02.001

Leoni L, Aria M (2021) A thirty-year bibliometric analysis on servitization. Int J Serv Sci Manag Eng Technol 12(3):73–95. https://doi.org/10.4018/IJSSMET.2021050105

Levitt T (1972) Production-line approach to service. Harv Bus Rev 50:41–52

Lightfoot H, Baines T, Smart P (2013) The servitization of manufacturing: a systematic literature review of interdependent trends. Int J Oper Prod Manag 33(11/12):1408–1434. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-07-2010-0196

Lindman M, Pennanen K, Rothenstei J, Scozzi B, Vincze Z (2016) The value space: how firms facilitate value creation. Bus Process Manag J 22(4):736–762. https://doi.org/10.1108/BPMJ-09-2015-0126

Luoto S, Brax SA, Kohtamäki M (2017) Critical meta-analysis of servitization research: constructing a model-narrative to reveal paradigmatic assumptions. Ind Mark Manag 60:89–100. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2016.04.008

Manzini E, Vezzoli C (2003) A strategic design approach to develop sustainable product service systems: examples taken from the ‘environmentally friendly innovation’ Italian prize. J Clean Prod 11(8):851–857. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0959-6526(02)00153-1

Marcon É, Marcon A, Ayala NF, Frank AG et al (2022) Capabilities supporting digital servitization: a multi-actor perspective. Ind Mark Manag 103:97–116. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2022.03.003

Martínez V, Bastl M, Kingston J, Evans S (2010) Challenges in transforming manufacturing organizations into product-service providers. J Manuf Technol Manag 21(4):449–469. https://doi.org/10.1108/17410381011046571

Martín-Peña ML, Ziaee Bigdeli A (2016) Servitization: academic research and business practice. Univ Bus Rev 49:18–31

Martín-Peña ML, Pinillos MJ, Reyes LE (2017) The intellectual basis of servitization: a bibliometric analysis. J Eng Technol Manag JET M 43:83–97. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jengtecman.2017.01.005

Martín-Peña ML, Díaz-Garrido E, Sánchez-López JM (2018) The digitalization and servitization of manufacturing: a review on digital business models. Strateg Change 27:91–99. https://doi.org/10.1002/jsc.2184

Martín-Peña ML, Sánchez-López JM, Díaz-Garrido E (2020) Servitization and digitalization in manufacturing: the influence on firm performance. J Bus Ind Mark 35(3):564–574. https://doi.org/10.1108/JBIM-12-2018-0400

Martín-Peña ML, Sanchez-Lopez JM, Kamp B, Gimenez-Fernandez EM (2023) The innovation antecedents behind the servitization-performance relationship. R D Manag 53:1–23. https://doi.org/10.1111/radm.12586

Mathieu V (2001) Service strategies within the manufacturing sector: benefits, costs and partnership. Int J Serv Ind Manag 12(5):451–475. https://doi.org/10.1108/EUM0000000006093

Matthyssens P, Vandenbempt K (2010) Service addition as business market strategy: identification of transition trajectories. J Serv Manag 21(5):693–714. https://doi.org/10.1108/09564231011079101

Minaya PE, Avella L, Trespalacios JA (2023) The effects of digital servitization on business competitiveness: A case study of Spanish manufacturers. J Int Entrep 21:180–213. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10843-023-00333-6

Momeni K, Raddats C, Martinsuo M (2023) Mechanisms for developing operational capabilities in digital servitization. Int J Oper Prod Manag 43(13):101–127. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-04-2022-0259

Mont O (2002) Clarifying the concept of product-service system. J Clean Prod 10(3):237–245. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0959-6526(01)00039-7

Mosch P, Schweikl S, Obermaier R (2021) Trapped in the supply chain? Digital servitization strategies and power relations in the case of an industrial technology supplier. Int J Prod Econ 236:1–14. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2021.108141

Müller JM, Buliga O, Voigt KI (2021) The role of absorptive capacity and innovation strategy in the design of Industry 4.0 business models—a comparison between SMEs and large enterprises. Eur Manag J 39(3):333–343. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.emj.2020.01.002

Münch C, Marx E, Benz L, Hartmann E, Matzner M (2022) Capabilities of digital servitization: evidence from the socio-technical systems theory. Technol Forecast Soc Change 176:1–17. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.techfore.2021.121361

Naik P, Schroeder A, Kapoor K, Ziaee Bigdeli A (2020) Behind the scenes of digital servitization: actualising IoT-enabled affordances. Ind Mark Manag 89:232–244. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2020.03.010

Neely A, Benedettini O, Visnjic I (2011) The servitization of manufacturing: further evidence. University of Cambridge, Cambridge, pp 1–11

Nordin F, Kowalkowski C (2010) Solutions offerings: a critical review and reconceptualization. J Serv Manag 21(4):441–459. https://doi.org/10.1108/09564231011066105

Oliva R, Kallenberg R (2003) Managing the transition from products to services. Int J Serv Ind Manag 14(2):160–172. https://doi.org/10.1108/09564230310474138

Oliveira MG, Mendes GH, Rozenfeld H (2015) Bibliometric analysis of the product-service system research field. Procedia CIRP 30:114–119. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procir.2015.02.139

Opazo-Basáez M, Vendrell-Herrero F, Bustinza OF (2021) Digital service innovation: a paradigm shift in technological innovation. J Serv Manag 33:97–120. https://doi.org/10.1108/JOSM-11-2020-0427

Ostrom AL, Bitner MJ, Brown SW, Burkhard KA et al (2010) Moving forward and making a difference: research priorities for the science of service. J Serv Res 13:4–36. https://doi.org/10.1177/1094670509357611

Paiola M, Gebauer H (2020) Internet of things technologies, digital servitization and business model innovation in BtoB manufacturing firms. Ind Mark Manag 89:245–264. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2020.03.009

Paiola M, Saccani N, Perona M, Gebauer H (2013) Moving from products to solutions: strategic approaches for developing capabilities. Eur Manag J 31(4):390–409. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.emj.2012.10.002

Parida V, Sjödin DR, Wincent J, Kohtamäki M (2014) Mastering the transition to product-service provision: insights into business models, learning activities, and capabilities. Res Technol Manag 57:44–52. https://doi.org/10.5437/08956308X5703227

Paschou T, Rapaccini M, Adrodegari F, Saccani N (2020) Digital servitization in manufacturing: a systematic literature review and research agenda. Ind Mark Manag 89:278–292. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2020.02.012

Pessôa MVP, Becker JMJ (2017) Overcoming the product-service model adoption obstacles. Procedia CIRP 64:163–168. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.procir.2017.03.062

Pettigrew AM (1988) The management of strategic change. B. Blackwell, Oxford

Pinillos MJ, Díaz-Garrido E, Martín-Peña ML (2022) The origin and evolution of the concept of servitization: a co-word and network analysis. J Bus Ind Mark 37(7):1497–1514. https://doi.org/10.1108/JBIM-02-2021-0120

Pombo D, Franco M (2023) A qualitative investigation of infusing products with service via strategic alliances among SMEs: a case of servitization. Serv Bus 17:529–555. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11628-023-00530-2

Pye A, Pettigrew A (2005) Studying board context, process and dynamics: some challenges for the future. Brit J Manag 16:27–38. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-8551.2005.00445.x

Qi Y, Mao Z, Zhang M, Guo H (2020) Manufacturing practices and servitization: the role of mass customization and product innovation capabilities. Int J Prod Econ 228:1–10. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2020.107747

Rabetino R, Kohtamäki M, Gebauer H (2017) Strategy map of servitization. Int J Prod Econ 192:144–156. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2016.11.004

Rabetino R, Kohtamäki M, Brax SA, Sihvonen J (2021) The tribes in the field of servitization: discovering latent streams across 30 years of research. Ind Mark Manag 95:70–84. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2021.04.005

Rabetino R, Kohtamäki M, Huikkola T (2023) Digital service innovation (DSI): a multidisciplinary (re)view of its origins and progress using bibliometric and text mining methods. J Serv Manag. https://doi.org/10.1108/JOSM-12-2022-0375

Raddats C (2011) Aligning industrial services with strategies and sources of market differentiation. J Bus Ind Mark 26(5):332–343. https://doi.org/10.1108/08858621111144398

Raddats C, Baines T, Burton J, Story VM, Zolkiewski J (2016) Motivations for servitization: the impact of product complexity. Int J Oper Prod Manag 36(5):572–591. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-09-2014-0447

Raddats C, Zolkiewski J, Story VM, Burton J et al (2017) Interactively developed capabilities: evidence from dyadic servitization relationships. Int J Oper Prod Manag 37(3):382–400. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-08-2015-0512

Raddats C, Kowalkowski C, Benedettini O, Burton J, Gebauer H (2019) Servitization: a contemporary thematic review of four major research streams. Ind Mark Manag 83:207–223. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2019.03.015

Raddats C, Naik P, Ziaee Bigdeli A (2022) Creating value in servitization through digital service innovations. Ind Mark Manag 104:1–13. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2022.04.002

Rakic S, Pero M, Sianesi A, Marjanovic U (2022) Digital servitization and firm performance: technology intensity approach. Eng Econ 33(4):398–413. https://doi.org/10.5755/j01.ee.33.4.29649

Reim W, Parida V, Örtqvist D (2015) Product-Service Systems (PSS) business models and tactics—a systematic literature review. J Clean Prod 97:61–75. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.JCLEPRO.2014.07.003

Reim W, Sjödin DR, Parida V (2019) Servitization of global service network actors—a contingency framework for matching challenges and strategies in service transition. J Bus Res 104:461–471. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2019.01.032

Rogers EM (2003) Diffusion of innovations. Free Press, New York

Ruiz-Martín A, Díaz-Garrido E (2021) A review of servitization theoretical foundations. J Ind Eng Manag 14(3):496–519. https://doi.org/10.3926/jiem.3466

Sandström S, Edvardsson B, Kristensson P, Magnusson P (2008) Value in use through service experience. Manag Serv Qual 18(2):112–126. https://doi.org/10.1108/09604520810859184

Santamaría L, Jesús Nieto M, Miles I (2012) Service innovation in manufacturing firms: evidence from Spain. Technovation 32(2):144–155. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.technovation.2011.08.006

Schroeder A, Baines T, Sakao T (2022) Increasing value capture by enhancing manufacturer commitment-managing the servitization process. IEEE Eng Manag Rev 50(3):1–13. https://doi.org/10.1109/EMR.2022.3197075

Shen L, Sun W, Parida V (2023) Consolidating digital servitization research: a systematic review, integrative framework, and future research directions. Technol Forecast Soc Change 191:1–24. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.techfore.2023.122478

Sjödin D, Parida V, Kohtamaki M, Wincent J (2020) An agile co-creation process for digital servitization: a micro-service innovation approach. J Bus Res 112:478–491. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2020.01.009

Sousa R, Da Silveira G (2017) Capability antecedents and performance outcomes of servitization: differences between basic and advanced services. Int J Oper Prod Manag 37(4):444–467. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-11-2015-0696

Spring M, Araujo L (2013) Beyond the service factory: service innovation in manufacturing supply networks. Ind Mark Manag 42:59–70. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2012.11.006

Tao F, Qi Q (2017) New IT driven service-oriented smart manufacturing: framework and characteristics. IEEE Trans Syst Man Cybern -Syst 49:81–91. https://doi.org/10.1109/TSMC.2017.2723764

Thomé AMT, Scavarda LF, Scavarda AJ (2016) Conducting systematic literature review in operations management. Prod Plann Control 27(5):408–420. https://doi.org/10.1080/09537287.2015.1129464

Tian J, Coreynen W, Matthyssens P, Shen L (2022) Platform-based servitization and business model adaptation by established manufacturers. Technovation 118:1–22. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.technovation.2021.102222

Tranfield D, Denyer D, Smart P (2003) Towards a methodology for developing evidence-informed management knowledge by means of systematic review. Brit J Manag 14:207–222. https://doi.org/10.1111/1467-8551.00375

Tronvoll B, Sklyar A, Sorhammar D, Kowalkowski C (2020) Transformational shifts through digital servitization. Ind Mark Manag 89:293–305. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2020.02.005

Tukker A (2004) Eight types of product-service system: eight ways to sustainability? Experience from SusProNet. Bus Strategy Environ 13:246–260. https://doi.org/10.1002/bse.414

Tukker A (2015) Product services for a resource-efficient and circular economy—a review. J Clean Prod 97:76–91. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.JCLEPRO.2013.11.049

Tukker A, Tischner U (2006) Product-services as a research field: past, present and future. Reflections from a decade of research. J Clean Prod 14(17):1552–1556. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2006.01.022

Tuli KR, Kohli AK, Bharadwaj SG (2007) Rethinking customer solutions: from product bundles to relational processes. J Mark 71(3):1–17. https://doi.org/10.1509/jmkg.71.3.1

Vandermerwe S, Rada J (1988) Servitization of business: adding value by adding services. Eur Manag J 6(4):314–324. https://doi.org/10.1016/0263-2373(88)90033-3

Vargo SL, Lusch RF (2008) Service-dominant logic: continuing the evolution. J Acad Mark Sci 36(1):1–10. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11747-007-0069-6

Vendrell-Herrero F, Bustinza OF, Parry G, Georgantzis N (2017) Servitization, digitization and supply chain interdependency. Ind Mark Manag 60:69–81. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2016.06.013

Visnjic I, Van Looy B (2013) Servitization: disentangling the impact of service business model innovation on manufacturing firm performance. J Oper Manag 31(4):169–180. https://doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.2407380

Wang W, Lai K, Shou Y (2018) The impact of servitization on firm performance: a meta-analysis. Int J Oper Prod Manag 38(7):1562–1588. https://doi.org/10.1108/IJOPM-04-2017-0204

Wang Z, Chen CH, Zheng P, Li X, Khoo LP (2021) A graph-based context-aware requirement elicitation approach in smart product-service systems. Int J Prod Res 59(2):635–651. https://doi.org/10.1080/00207543.2019.1702227

Windahl C, Lakemond N (2006) Developing integrated solutions: the importance of relationships within the network. Ind Mark Manag 35(7):806–818. https://doi.org/10.1016/J.INDMARMAN.2006.05.010

Xing Y, Liu Y, Davies P (2023) Servitization innovation: a systematic review, integrative framework, and future research directions. Technovation 122:1–15. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.technovation.2022.102641

Yan K, Li G, Cheng TCE (2020) The impact of service-oriented organizational design factors on firm performance: the moderating role of service-oriented corporate culture. Int J Prod Econ 228:1–13. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2020.107745

Yu Y, Sung TJ (2023) A value-based view of the smart PSS adoption: a study of smart kitchen appliances. Serv Bus 17:499–527. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11628-023-00529-9

Zhang W, Banerji S (2017) Challenges of servitization: a systematic literature review. Ind Mark Manag 65:217–227. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2017.06.003

Zhang K, Feng L, Wang J, Lin KY, Li Q (2023) Servitization in business ecosystem: a systematic review and implications for business-to-business servitization research. Technol Anal Strateg Manag 35(11):1480–1496. https://doi.org/10.1080/09537325.2021.2010698

Zheng P, Lin T, Chen C, Xu X (2018) A systematic design approach for service innovation of smart product-service systems. J Clean Prod 201:657–667. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2018.08.101

Zheng P, Liu Y, Tao F, Wang Z, Chen C (2019) Smart product-service systems solution design via hybrid crowd sensing approach. IEEE Access 7:1–12. https://doi.org/10.1109/ACCESS.2019.2939828

Zhou C, Song W (2021) Digitalization as a way forward: a bibliometric analysis of 20 years of servitization research. J Clean Prod 300:1–14. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2021.126943

Zhou D, Yan T, Dai W, Feng J (2021) Disentangling the interactions within and between servitization and digitalization strategies: a service-dominant logic. Int J Prod Econ 238:1–16. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ijpe.2021.108175

Ziaee Bigdeli A, Baines T, Bustinza OF, Guang Shi V (2017) Organisational change towards servitization: a theoretical framework. Compet Rev 27(1):12–39. https://doi.org/10.1108/CR-03-2015-0015

Ziaee Bigdeli A, Baines T, Schroeder A, Brown S (2018) Measuring servitization progress and outcome: the case of ‘advanced services.’ Prod Plann Control 29(4):315–332. https://doi.org/10.1080/09537287.2018.1429029

Zighan S, Abualqumboz M (2022) Dual focus: service-product orientation to manage the change paradox following servitization strategy. Serv Bus 16:29–55. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11628-022-00483-y

Download references

Open Access funding provided thanks to the CRUE-CSIC agreement with Springer Nature.

Author information

Authors and affiliations.

Management and Business Economics Department, University of Leon, Leon, Spain

Pedro E. Minaya

Business Administration Department, University of Oviedo, Oviedo, Spain

Lucía Avella & Juan A. Trespalacios

You can also search for this author in PubMed   Google Scholar

Corresponding author

Correspondence to Pedro E. Minaya .

Additional information

Publisher's note.

Springer Nature remains neutral with regard to jurisdictional claims in published maps and institutional affiliations.

Rights and permissions

Open Access This article is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License, which permits use, sharing, adaptation, distribution and reproduction in any medium or format, as long as you give appropriate credit to the original author(s) and the source, provide a link to the Creative Commons licence, and indicate if changes were made. The images or other third party material in this article are included in the article's Creative Commons licence, unless indicated otherwise in a credit line to the material. If material is not included in the article's Creative Commons licence and your intended use is not permitted by statutory regulation or exceeds the permitted use, you will need to obtain permission directly from the copyright holder. To view a copy of this licence, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/ .

Reprints and permissions

About this article

Minaya, P.E., Avella, L. & Trespalacios, J.A. Synthesizing three decades of digital servitization: a systematic literature review and conceptual framework proposal. Serv Bus (2024). https://doi.org/10.1007/s11628-024-00559-x

Download citation

Received : 28 September 2023

Accepted : 16 April 2024

Published : 08 May 2024

DOI : https://doi.org/10.1007/s11628-024-00559-x

Share this article

Anyone you share the following link with will be able to read this content:

Sorry, a shareable link is not currently available for this article.

Provided by the Springer Nature SharedIt content-sharing initiative

• Digital servitization
• Industry 4.0
• Product-service system
• Systematic literature review
• Business competitiveness
• Find a journal
• Publish with us
• Track your research

Thank you for visiting nature.com. You are using a browser version with limited support for CSS. To obtain the best experience, we recommend you use a more up to date browser (or turn off compatibility mode in Internet Explorer). In the meantime, to ensure continued support, we are displaying the site without styles and JavaScript.

• View all journals
• My Account Login
• Explore content
• About the journal
• Publish with us
• Sign up for alerts
• Open access
• Published: 08 May 2024

Exploring the dynamics of consumer engagement in social media influencer marketing: from the self-determination theory perspective

• Chenyu Gu   ORCID: orcid.org/0000-0001-6059-0573 1 &
• Qiuting Duan 2  

Humanities and Social Sciences Communications volume  11 , Article number:  587 ( 2024 ) Cite this article

404 Accesses

2 Altmetric

Metrics details

• Business and management
• Cultural and media studies

Influencer advertising has emerged as an integral part of social media marketing. Within this realm, consumer engagement is a critical indicator for gauging the impact of influencer advertisements, as it encompasses the proactive involvement of consumers in spreading advertisements and creating value. Therefore, investigating the mechanisms behind consumer engagement holds significant relevance for formulating effective influencer advertising strategies. The current study, grounded in self-determination theory and employing a stimulus-organism-response framework, constructs a general model to assess the impact of influencer factors, advertisement information, and social factors on consumer engagement. Analyzing data from 522 samples using structural equation modeling, the findings reveal: (1) Social media influencers are effective at generating initial online traffic but have limited influence on deeper levels of consumer engagement, cautioning advertisers against overestimating their impact; (2) The essence of higher-level engagement lies in the ad information factor, affirming that in the new media era, content remains ‘king’; (3) Interpersonal factors should also be given importance, as influencing the surrounding social groups of consumers is one of the effective ways to enhance the impact of advertising. Theoretically, current research broadens the scope of both social media and advertising effectiveness studies, forming a bridge between influencer marketing and consumer engagement. Practically, the findings offer macro-level strategic insights for influencer marketing.

Similar content being viewed by others

Exploring the effects of audience and strategies used by beauty vloggers on behavioural intention towards endorsed brands

COBRAs and virality: viral campaign values on consumer behaviour

Exploring the impact of beauty vloggers’ credible attributes, parasocial interaction, and trust on consumer purchase intention in influencer marketing

Introduction.

Recent studies have highlighted an escalating aversion among audiences towards traditional online ads, leading to a diminishing effectiveness of traditional online advertising methods (Lou et al., 2019 ). In an effort to overcome these challenges, an increasing number of brands are turning to influencers as their spokespersons for advertising. Utilizing influencers not only capitalizes on their significant influence over their fan base but also allows for the dissemination of advertising messages in a more native and organic manner. Consequently, influencer-endorsed advertising has become a pivotal component and a growing trend in social media advertising (Gräve & Bartsch, 2022 ). Although the topic of influencer-endorsed advertising has garnered increasing attention from scholars, the field is still in its infancy, offering ample opportunities for in-depth research and exploration (Barta et al., 2023 ).

Presently, social media influencers—individuals with substantial follower bases—have emerged as the new vanguard in advertising (Hudders & Lou, 2023 ). Their tweets and videos possess the remarkable potential to sway the purchasing decisions of thousands if not millions. This influence largely hinges on consumer engagement behaviors, implying that the impact of advertising can proliferate throughout a consumer’s entire social network (Abbasi et al., 2023 ). Consequently, exploring ways to enhance consumer engagement is of paramount theoretical and practical significance for advertising effectiveness research (Xiao et al., 2023 ). This necessitates researchers to delve deeper into the exploration of the stimulating factors and psychological mechanisms influencing consumer engagement behaviors (Vander Schee et al., 2020 ), which is the gap this study seeks to address.

The Stimulus-Organism-Response (S-O-R) framework has been extensively applied in the study of consumer engagement behaviors (Tak & Gupta, 2021 ) and has been shown to integrate effectively with self-determination theory (Yang et al., 2019 ). Therefore, employing the S-O-R framework to investigate consumer engagement behaviors in the context of influencer advertising is considered a rational approach. The current study embarks on an in-depth analysis of the transformation process from three distinct dimensions. In the Stimulus (S) phase, we focus on how influencer factors, advertising message factors, and social influence factors act as external stimuli. This phase scrutinizes the external environment’s role in triggering consumer reactions. During the Organism (O) phase, the research explores the intrinsic psychological motivations affecting individual behavior as posited in self-determination theory. This includes the willingness for self-disclosure, the desire for innovation, and trust in advertising messages. The investigation in this phase aims to understand how these internal motivations shape consumer attitudes and perceptions in the context of influencer marketing. Finally, in the Response (R) phase, the study examines how these psychological factors influence consumer engagement behavior. This part of the research seeks to understand the transition from internal psychological states to actual consumer behavior, particularly how these states drive the consumers’ deep integration and interaction with the influencer content.

Despite the inherent limitations of cross-sectional analysis in capturing the full temporal dynamics of consumer engagement, this study seeks to unveil the dynamic interplay between consumers’ psychological needs—autonomy, competence, and relatedness—and their varying engagement levels in social media influencer marketing, grounded in self-determination theory. Through this lens, by analyzing factors related to influencers, content, and social context, we aim to infer potential dynamic shifts in engagement behaviors as psychological needs evolve. This approach allows us to offer a snapshot of the complex, multi-dimensional nature of consumer engagement dynamics, providing valuable insights for both theoretical exploration and practical application in the constantly evolving domain of social media marketing. Moreover, the current study underscores the significance of adapting to the dynamic digital environment and highlights the evolving nature of consumer engagement in the realm of digital marketing.

Literature review

Stimulus-organism-response (s-o-r) model.

The Stimulus-Response (S-R) model, originating from behaviorist psychology and introduced by psychologist Watson ( 1917 ), posits that individual behaviors are directly induced by external environmental stimuli. However, this model overlooks internal personal factors, complicating the explanation of psychological states. Mehrabian and Russell ( 1974 ) expanded this by incorporating the individual’s cognitive component (organism) into the model, creating the Stimulus-Organism-Response (S-O-R) framework. This model has become a crucial theoretical framework in consumer psychology as it interprets internal psychological cognitions as mediators between stimuli and responses. Integrating with psychological theories, the S-O-R model effectively analyzes and explains the significant impact of internal psychological factors on behavior (Koay et al., 2020 ; Zhang et al., 2021 ), and is extensively applied in investigating user behavior on social media platforms (Hewei & Youngsook, 2022 ). This study combines the S-O-R framework with self-determination theory to examine consumer engagement behaviors in the context of social media influencer advertising, a logic also supported by some studies (Yang et al., 2021 ).

Self-determination theory

Self-determination theory, proposed by Richard and Edward (2000), is a theoretical framework exploring human behavioral motivation and personality. The theory emphasizes motivational processes, positing that individual behaviors are developed based on factors satisfying their psychological needs. It suggests that individual behavioral tendencies are influenced by the needs for competence, relatedness, and autonomy. Furthermore, self-determination theory, along with organic integration theory, indicates that individual behavioral tendencies are also affected by internal psychological motivations and external situational factors.

Self-determination theory has been validated by scholars in the study of online user behaviors. For example, Sweet applied the theory to the investigation of community building in online networks, analyzing knowledge-sharing behaviors among online community members (Sweet et al., 2020 ). Further literature review reveals the applicability of self-determination theory to consumer engagement behaviors, particularly in the context of influencer marketing advertisements. Firstly, self-determination theory is widely applied in studying the psychological motivations behind online behaviors, suggesting that the internal and external motivations outlined within the theory might also apply to exploring consumer behaviors in influencer marketing scenarios (Itani et al., 2022 ). Secondly, although research on consumer engagement in the social media influencer advertising context is still in its early stages, some studies have utilized SDT to explore behaviors such as information sharing and electronic word-of-mouth dissemination (Astuti & Hariyawan, 2021 ). These behaviors, which are part of the content contribution and creation dimensions of consumer engagement, may share similarities in the underlying psychological motivational mechanisms. Thus, this study will build upon these foundations to construct the Organism (O) component of the S-O-R model, integrating insights from SDT to further understand consumer engagement in influencer marketing.

Consumer engagement

Although scholars generally agree at a macro level to define consumer engagement as the creation of additional value by consumers or customers beyond purchasing products, the specific categorization of consumer engagement varies in different studies. For instance, Simon and Tossan interpret consumer engagement as a psychological willingness to interact with influencers (Simon & Tossan, 2018 ). However, such a broad definition lacks precision in describing various levels of engagement. Other scholars directly use tangible metrics on social media platforms, such as likes, saves, comments, and shares, to represent consumer engagement (Lee et al., 2018 ). While this quantitative approach is not flawed and can be highly effective in practical applications, it overlooks the content aspect of engagement, contradicting the “content is king” principle of advertising and marketing. We advocate for combining consumer engagement with the content aspect, as content engagement not only generates more traces of consumer online behavior (Oestreicher-Singer & Zalmanson, 2013 ) but, more importantly, content contribution and creation are central to social media advertising and marketing, going beyond mere content consumption (Qiu & Kumar, 2017 ). Meanwhile, we also need to emphasize that engagement is not a fixed state but a fluctuating process influenced by ongoing interactions between consumers and influencers, mediated by the evolving nature of social media platforms and the shifting sands of consumer preferences (Pradhan et al., 2023 ). Consumer engagement in digital environments undergoes continuous change, reflecting a journey rather than a destination (Viswanathan et al., 2017 ).

The current study adopts a widely accepted definition of consumer engagement from existing research, offering operational feasibility and aligning well with the research objectives of this paper. Consumer engagement behaviors in the context of this study encompass three dimensions: content consumption, content contribution, and content creation (Muntinga et al., 2011 ). These dimensions reflect a spectrum of digital engagement behaviors ranging from low to high levels (Schivinski et al., 2016 ). Specifically, content consumption on social media platforms represents a lower level of engagement, where consumers merely click and read the information but do not actively contribute or create user-generated content. Some studies consider this level of engagement as less significant for in-depth exploration because content consumption, compared to other forms, generates fewer visible traces of consumer behavior (Brodie et al., 2013 ). Even in a study by Qiu and Kumar, it was noted that the conversion rate of content consumption is low, contributing minimally to the success of social media marketing (Qiu & Kumar, 2017 ).

On the other hand, content contribution, especially content creation, is central to social media marketing. When consumers comment on influencer content or share information with their network nodes, it is termed content contribution, representing a medium level of online consumer engagement (Piehler et al., 2019 ). Furthermore, when consumers actively upload and post brand-related content on social media, this higher level of behavior is referred to as content creation. Content creation represents the highest level of consumer engagement (Cheung et al., 2021 ). Although medium and high levels of consumer engagement are more valuable for social media advertising and marketing, this exploratory study still retains the content consumption dimension of consumer engagement behaviors.

Theoretical framework

Internal organism factors: self-disclosure willingness, innovativeness, and information trust.

In existing research based on self-determination theory that focuses on online behavior, competence, relatedness, and autonomy are commonly considered as internal factors influencing users’ online behaviors. However, this approach sometimes strays from the context of online consumption. Therefore, in studies related to online consumption, scholars often use self-disclosure willingness as an overt representation of autonomy, innovativeness as a representation of competence, and trust as a representation of relatedness (Mahmood et al., 2019 ).

The use of these overt variables can be logically explained as follows: According to self-determination theory, individuals with a higher level of self-determination are more likely to adopt compensatory mechanisms to facilitate behavior compared to those with lower self-determination (Wehmeyer, 1999 ). Self-disclosure, a voluntary act of sharing personal information with others, is considered a key behavior in the development of interpersonal relationships. In social environments, self-disclosure can effectively alleviate stress and build social connections, while also seeking societal validation of personal ideas (Altman & Taylor, 1973 ). Social networks, as para-social entities, possess the interactive attributes of real societies and are likely to exhibit similar mechanisms. In consumer contexts, personal disclosures can include voluntary sharing of product interests, consumption experiences, and future purchase intentions (Robertshaw & Marr, 2006 ). While material incentives can prompt personal information disclosure, many consumers disclose personal information online voluntarily, which can be traced back to an intrinsic need for autonomy (Stutzman et al., 2011 ). Thus, in this study, we consider the self-disclosure willingness as a representation of high autonomy.

Innovativeness refers to an individual’s internal level of seeking novelty and represents their personality and tendency for novelty (Okazaki, 2009 ). Often used in consumer research, innovative consumers are inclined to try new technologies and possess an intrinsic motivation to use new products. Previous studies have shown that consumers with high innovativeness are more likely to search for information on new products and share their experiences and expertise with others, reflecting a recognition of their own competence (Kaushik & Rahman, 2014 ). Therefore, in consumer contexts, innovativeness is often regarded as the competence dimension within the intrinsic factors of self-determination (Wang et al., 2016 ), with external motivations like information novelty enhancing this intrinsic motivation (Lee et al., 2015 ).

Trust refers to an individual’s willingness to rely on the opinions of others they believe in. From a social psychological perspective, trust indicates the willingness to assume the risk of being harmed by another party (McAllister, 1995 ). Widely applied in social media contexts for relational marketing, information trust has been proven to positively influence the exchange and dissemination of consumer information, representing a close and advanced relationship between consumers and businesses, brands, or advertising endorsers (Steinhoff et al., 2019 ). Consumers who trust brands or social media influencers are more willing to share information without fear of exploitation (Pop et al., 2022 ), making trust a commonly used representation of the relatedness dimension in self-determination within consumer contexts.

Construction of the path from organism to response: self-determination internal factors and consumer engagement behavior

Following the logic outlined above, the current study represents the internal factors of self-determination theory through three variables: self-disclosure willingness, innovativeness, and information trust. Next, the study explores the association between these self-determination internal factors and consumer engagement behavior, thereby constructing the link between Organism (O) and Response (R).

Self-disclosure willingness and consumer engagement behavior

In the realm of social sciences, the concept of self-disclosure willingness has been thoroughly examined from diverse disciplinary perspectives, encompassing communication studies, sociology, and psychology. Viewing from the lens of social interaction dynamics, self-disclosure is acknowledged as a fundamental precondition for the initiation and development of online social relationships and interactive engagements (Luo & Hancock, 2020 ). It constitutes an indispensable component within the spectrum of interactive behaviors and the evolution of interpersonal connections. Voluntary self-disclosure is characterized by individuals divulging information about themselves, which typically remains unknown to others and is inaccessible through alternative sources. This concept aligns with the tenets of uncertainty reduction theory, which argues that during interpersonal engagements, individuals seek information about their counterparts as a means to mitigate uncertainties inherent in social interactions (Lee et al., 2008 ). Self-disclosure allows others to gain more personal information, thereby helping to reduce the uncertainty in interpersonal relationships. Such disclosure is voluntary rather than coerced, and this sharing of information can facilitate the development of relationships between individuals (Towner et al., 2022 ). Furthermore, individuals who actively engage in social media interactions (such as liking, sharing, and commenting on others’ content) often exhibit higher levels of self-disclosure (Chu et al., 2023 ); additional research indicates a positive correlation between self-disclosure and online engagement behaviors (Lee et al., 2023 ). Taking the context of the current study, the autonomous self-disclosure willingness can incline social media users to read advertising content more attentively and share information with others, and even create evaluative content. Therefore, this paper proposes the following research hypothesis:

H1a: The self-disclosure willingness is positively correlated with content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H1b: The self-disclosure willingness is positively correlated with content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H1c: The self-disclosure willingness is positively correlated with content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Innovativeness and consumer engagement behavior

Innovativeness represents an individual’s propensity to favor new technologies and the motivation to use new products, associated with the cognitive perception of one’s self-competence. Individuals with a need for self-competence recognition often exhibit higher innovativeness (Kelley & Alden, 2016 ). Existing research indicates that users with higher levels of innovativeness are more inclined to accept new product information and share their experiences and discoveries with others in their social networks (Yusuf & Busalim, 2018 ). Similarly, in the context of this study, individuals, as followers of influencers, signify an endorsement of the influencer. Driven by innovativeness, they may be more eager to actively receive information from influencers. If they find the information valuable, they are likely to share it and even engage in active content re-creation to meet their expectations of self-image. Therefore, this paper proposes the following research hypotheses:

H2a: The innovativeness of social media users is positively correlated with content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H2b: The innovativeness of social media users is positively correlated with content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H2c: The innovativeness of social media users is positively correlated with content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Information trust and consumer engagement

Trust refers to an individual’s willingness to rely on the statements and opinions of a target object (Moorman et al., 1993 ). Extensive research indicates that trust positively impacts information dissemination and content sharing in interpersonal communication environments (Majerczak & Strzelecki, 2022 ); when trust is established, individuals are more willing to share their resources and less suspicious of being exploited. Trust has also been shown to influence consumers’ participation in community building and content sharing on social media, demonstrating cross-cultural universality (Anaya-Sánchez et al., 2020 ).

Trust in influencer advertising information is also a key predictor of consumers’ information exchange online. With many social media users now operating under real-name policies, there is an increased inclination to trust information shared on social media over that posted by corporate accounts or anonymously. Additionally, as users’ social networks partially overlap with their real-life interpersonal networks, extensive research shows that more consumers increasingly rely on information posted and shared on social networks when making purchase decisions (Wang et al., 2016 ). This aligns with the effectiveness goals of influencer marketing advertisements and the characteristics of consumer engagement. Trust in the content posted by influencers is considered a manifestation of a strong relationship between fans and influencers, central to relationship marketing (Kim & Kim, 2021 ). Based on trust in the influencer, which then extends to trust in their content, people are more inclined to browse information posted by influencers, share this information with others, and even create their own content without fear of exploitation or negative consequences. Therefore, this paper proposes the following research hypotheses:

H3a: Information trust is positively correlated with content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H3b: Information trust is positively correlated with content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H3c: Information trust is positively correlated with content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Construction of the path from stimulus to organism: influencer factors, advertising information factors, social factors, and self-determination internal factors

Having established the logical connection from Organism (O) to Response (R), we further construct the influence path from Stimulus (S) to Organism (O). Revisiting the definition of influencer advertising in social media, companies, and brands leverage influencers on social media platforms to disseminate advertising content, utilizing the influencers’ relationships and influence over consumers for marketing purposes. In addition to consumer’s internal factors, elements such as companies, brands, influencers, and the advertisements themselves also impact consumer behavior. Although factors like the brand image perception of companies may influence consumer behavior, considering that in influencer marketing, companies and brands do not directly interact with consumers, this study prioritizes the dimensions of influencers and advertisements. Furthermore, the impact of social factors on individual cognition and behavior is significant, thus, the current study integrates influencers, advertisements, and social dimensions as the Stimulus (S) component.

Influencer factors: parasocial identification

Self-determination theory posits that relationships are one of the key motivators influencing individual behavior. In the context of social media research, users anticipate establishing a parasocial relationship with influencers, resembling real-life relationships. Hence, we consider the parasocial identification arising from users’ parasocial interactions with influencers as the relational motivator. Parasocial interaction refers to the one-sided personal relationship that individuals develop with media characters (Donald & Richard, 1956 ). During this process, individuals believe that the media character is directly communicating with them, creating a sense of positive intimacy (Giles, 2002 ). Over time, through repeated unilateral interactions with media characters, individuals develop a parasocial relationship, leading to parasocial identification. However, parasocial identification should not be directly equated with the concept of social identification in social identity theory. Social identification occurs when individuals psychologically de-individualize themselves, perceiving the characteristics of their social group as their own, upon identifying themselves as part of that group. In contrast, parasocial identification refers to the one-sided interactional identification with media characters (such as celebrities or influencers) over time (Chen et al., 2021 ). Particularly when individuals’ needs for interpersonal interaction are not met in their daily lives, they turn to parasocial interactions to fulfill these needs (Shan et al., 2020 ). Especially on social media, which is characterized by its high visibility and interactivity, users can easily develop a strong parasocial identification with the influencers they follow (Wei et al., 2022 ).

Parasocial identification and self-disclosure willingness

Theories like uncertainty reduction, personal construct, and social exchange are often applied to explain the emergence of parasocial identification. Social media, with its convenient and interactive modes of information dissemination, enables consumers to easily follow influencers on media platforms. They can perceive the personality of influencers through their online content, viewing them as familiar individuals or even friends. Once parasocial identification develops, this pleasurable experience can significantly influence consumers’ cognitions and thus their behavioral responses. Research has explored the impact of parasocial identification on consumer behavior. For instance, Bond et al. found that on Twitter, the intensity of users’ parasocial identification with influencers positively correlates with their continuous monitoring of these influencers’ activities (Bond, 2016 ). Analogous to real life, where we tend to pay more attention to our friends in our social networks, a similar phenomenon occurs in the relationship between consumers and brands. This type of parasocial identification not only makes consumers willing to follow brand pages but also more inclined to voluntarily provide personal information (Chen et al., 2021 ). Based on this logic, we speculate that a similar relationship may exist between social media influencers and their fans. Fans develop parasocial identification with influencers through social media interactions, making them more willing to disclose their information, opinions, and views in the comment sections of the influencers they follow, engaging in more frequent social interactions (Chung & Cho, 2017 ), even if the content at times may be brand or company-embedded marketing advertisements. In other words, in the presence of influencers with whom they have established parasocial relationships, they are more inclined to disclose personal information, thereby promoting consumer engagement behavior. Therefore, we propose the following research hypotheses:

H4: Parasocial identification is positively correlated with consumer self-disclosure willingness.

H4a: Self-disclosure willingness mediates the impact of parasocial identification on content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H4b: Self-disclosure willingness mediates the impact of parasocial identification on content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H4c: Self-disclosure willingness mediates the impact of parasocial identification on content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Parasocial identification and information trust

Information Trust refers to consumers’ willingness to trust the information contained in advertisements and to place themselves at risk. These risks include purchasing products inconsistent with the advertised information and the negative social consequences of erroneously spreading this information to others, leading to unpleasant consumption experiences (Minton, 2015 ). In advertising marketing, gaining consumers’ trust in advertising information is crucial. In the context of influencer marketing on social media, companies, and brands leverage the social connection between influencers and their fans. According to cognitive empathy theory, consumers project their trust in influencers onto the products endorsed, explaining the phenomenon of ‘loving the house for the crow on its roof.’ Research indicates that parasocial identification with influencers is a necessary condition for trust development. Consumers engage in parasocial interactions with influencers on social media, leading to parasocial identification (Jin et al., 2021 ). Consumers tend to reduce their cognitive load and simplify their decision-making processes, thus naturally adopting a positive attitude and trust towards advertising information disseminated by influencers with whom they have established parasocial identification. This forms the core logic behind the success of influencer marketing advertisements (Breves et al., 2021 ); furthermore, as mentioned earlier, because consumers trust these advertisements, they are also willing to share this information with friends and family and even engage in content re-creation. Therefore, we propose the following research hypotheses:

H5: Parasocial identification is positively correlated with information trust.

H5a: Information trust mediates the impact of parasocial identification on content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H5b: Information trust mediates the impact of parasocial identification on content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H5c: Information trust mediates the impact of parasocial identification on content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Influencer factors: source credibility

Source credibility refers to the degree of trust consumers place in the influencer as a source, based on the influencer’s reliability and expertise. Numerous studies have validated the effectiveness of the endorsement effect in advertising (Schouten et al., 2021 ). The Source Credibility Model, proposed by the renowned American communication scholar Hovland and the “Yale School,” posits that in the process of information dissemination, the credibility of the source can influence the audience’s decision to accept the information. The credibility of the information is determined by two aspects of the source: reliability and expertise. Reliability refers to the audience’s trust in the “communicator’s objective and honest approach to providing information,” while expertise refers to the audience’s trust in the “communicator being perceived as an effective source of information” (Hovland et al., 1953 ). Hovland’s definitions reveal that the interpretation of source credibility is not about the inherent traits of the source itself but rather the audience’s perception of the source (Jang et al., 2021 ). This differs from trust and serves as a precursor to the development of trust. Specifically, reliability and expertise are based on the audience’s perception; thus, this aligns closely with the audience’s perception of influencers (Kim & Kim, 2021 ). This credibility is a cognitive statement about the source of information.

Source credibility and self-disclosure willingness

Some studies have confirmed the positive impact of an influencer’s self-disclosure on their credibility as a source (Leite & Baptista, 2022 ). However, few have explored the impact of an influencer’s credibility, as a source, on consumers’ self-disclosure willingness. Undoubtedly, an impact exists; self-disclosure is considered a method to attempt to increase intimacy with others (Leite et al., 2022 ). According to social exchange theory, people promote relationships through the exchange of information in interpersonal communication to gain benefits (Cropanzano & Mitchell, 2005 ). Credibility, deriving from an influencer’s expertise and reliability, means that a highly credible influencer may provide more valuable information to consumers. Therefore, based on the social exchange theory’s logic of reciprocal benefits, consumers might be more willing to disclose their information to trustworthy influencers, potentially even expanding social interactions through further consumer engagement behaviors. Thus, we propose the following research hypotheses:

H6: Source credibility is positively correlated with self-disclosure willingness.

H6a: Self-disclosure willingness mediates the impact of Source credibility on content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H6b: Self-disclosure willingness mediates the impact of Source credibility on content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H6c: Self-disclosure willingness mediates the impact of Source credibility on content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Source credibility and information trust

Based on the Source Credibility Model, the credibility of an endorser as an information source can significantly influence consumers’ acceptance of the information (Shan et al., 2020 ). Existing research has demonstrated the positive impact of source credibility on consumers. Djafarova, in a study based on Instagram, noted through in-depth interviews with 18 users that an influencer’s credibility significantly affects respondents’ trust in the information they post. This credibility is composed of expertise and relevance to consumers, and influencers on social media are considered more trustworthy than traditional celebrities (Djafarova & Rushworth, 2017 ). Subsequently, Bao and colleagues validated in the Chinese consumer context, based on the ELM model and commitment-trust theory, that the credibility of brand pages on Weibo effectively fosters consumer trust in the brand, encouraging participation in marketing activities (Bao & Wang, 2021 ). Moreover, Hsieh et al. found that in e-commerce contexts, the credibility of the source is a significant factor influencing consumers’ trust in advertising information (Hsieh & Li, 2020 ). In summary, existing research has proven that the credibility of the source can promote consumer trust. Influencer credibility is a significant antecedent affecting consumers’ trust in the advertised content they publish. In brand communities, trust can foster consumer engagement behaviors (Habibi et al., 2014 ). Specifically, consumers are more likely to trust the advertising content published by influencers with higher credibility (more expertise and reliability), and as previously mentioned, consumer engagement behavior is more likely to occur. Based on this, the study proposes the following research hypotheses:

H7: Source credibility is positively correlated with information trust.

H7a: Information trust mediates the impact of source credibility on content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H7b: Information trust mediates the impact of source credibility on content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H7c: Information trust mediates the impact of source credibility on content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Advertising information factors: informative value

Advertising value refers to “the relative utility value of advertising information to consumers and is a subjective evaluation by consumers.” In his research, Ducoffe pointed out that in the context of online advertising, the informative value of advertising is a significant component of advertising value (Ducoffe, 1995 ). Subsequent studies have proven that consumers’ perception of advertising value can effectively promote their behavioral response to advertisements (Van-Tien Dao et al., 2014 ). Informative value of advertising refers to “the information about products needed by consumers provided by the advertisement and its ability to enhance consumer purchase satisfaction.” From the perspective of information dissemination, valuable advertising information should help consumers make better purchasing decisions and reduce the effort spent searching for product information. The informational aspect of advertising has been proven to effectively influence consumers’ cognition and, in turn, their behavior (Haida & Rahim, 2015 ).

Informative value and innovativeness

As previously discussed, consumers’ innovativeness refers to their psychological trait of favoring new things. Studies have shown that consumers with high innovativeness prefer novel and valuable product information, as it satisfies their need for newness and information about new products, making it an important factor in social media advertising engagement (Shi, 2018 ). This paper also hypothesizes that advertisements with high informative value can activate consumers’ innovativeness, as the novelty of information is one of the measures of informative value (León et al., 2009 ). Acquiring valuable information can make individuals feel good about themselves and fulfill their perception of a “novel image.” According to social exchange theory, consumers can gain social capital in interpersonal interactions (such as social recognition) by sharing information about these new products they perceive as valuable. Therefore, the current study proposes the following research hypothesis:

H8: Informative value is positively correlated with innovativeness.

H8a: Innovativeness mediates the impact of informative value on content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H8b: Innovativeness mediates the impact of informative value on content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H8c: Innovativeness mediates the impact of informative value on content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Informative value and information trust

Trust is a multi-layered concept explored across various disciplines, including communication, marketing, sociology, and psychology. For the purposes of this paper, a deep analysis of different levels of trust is not undertaken. Here, trust specifically refers to the trust in influencer advertising information within the context of social media marketing, denoting consumers’ belief in and reliance on the advertising information endorsed by influencers. Racherla et al. investigated the factors influencing consumers’ trust in online reviews, suggesting that information quality and value contribute to increasing trust (Racherla et al., 2012 ). Similarly, Luo and Yuan, in a study based on social media marketing, also confirmed that the value of advertising information posted on brand pages can foster consumer trust in the content (Lou & Yuan, 2019 ). Therefore, by analogy, this paper posits that the informative value of influencer-endorsed advertising can also promote consumer trust in that advertising information. The relationship between trust in advertising information and consumer engagement behavior has been discussed earlier. Thus, the current study proposes the following research hypotheses:

H9: Informative value is positively correlated with information trust.

H9a: Information trust mediates the impact of informative value on content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H9b: Information trust mediates the impact of informative value on content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H9c: Information trust mediates the impact of informative value on content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Advertising information factors: ad targeting accuracy

Ad targeting accuracy refers to the degree of match between the substantive information contained in advertising content and consumer needs. Advertisements containing precise information often yield good advertising outcomes. In marketing practice, advertisers frequently use information technology to analyze the characteristics of different consumer groups in the target market and then target their advertisements accordingly to achieve precise dissemination and, consequently, effective advertising results. The utility of ad targeting accuracy has been confirmed by many studies. For instance, in the research by Qiu and Chen, using a modified UTAUT model, it was demonstrated that the accuracy of advertising effectively promotes consumer acceptance of advertisements in WeChat Moments (Qiu & Chen, 2018 ). Although some studies on targeted advertising also indicate that overly precise ads may raise concerns about personal privacy (Zhang et al., 2019 ), overall, the accuracy of advertising information is effective in enhancing advertising outcomes and is a key element in the success of targeted advertising.

Ad targeting accuracy and information trust

In influencer marketing advertisements, due to the special relationship recognition between consumers and influencers, the privacy concerns associated with ad targeting accuracy are alleviated (Vrontis et al., 2021 ). Meanwhile, the informative value brought by targeting accuracy is highlighted. More precise advertising content implies higher informative value and also signifies that the advertising content is more worthy of consumer trust (Della Vigna, Gentzkow, 2010 ). As previously discussed, people are more inclined to read and engage with advertising content they trust and recognize. Therefore, the current study proposes the following research hypotheses:

H10: Ad targeting accuracy is positively correlated with information trust.

H10a: Information trust mediates the impact of ad targeting accuracy on content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H10b: Information trust mediates the impact of ad targeting accuracy on content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H10c: Information trust mediates the impact of ad targeting accuracy on content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Social factors: subjective norm

The Theory of Planned Behavior, proposed by Ajzen ( 1991 ), suggests that individuals’ actions are preceded by conscious choices and are underlain by plans. TPB has been widely used by scholars in studying personal online behaviors, these studies collectively validate the applicability of TPB in the context of social media for researching online behaviors (Huang, 2023 ). Additionally, the self-determination theory, which underpins this chapter’s research, also supports the notion that individuals’ behavioral decisions are based on internal cognitions, aligning with TPB’s assertions. Therefore, this paper intends to select subjective norms from TPB as a factor of social influence. Subjective norm refers to an individual’s perception of the expectations of significant others in their social relationships regarding their behavior. Empirical research in the consumption field has demonstrated the significant impact of subjective norms on individual psychological cognition (Yang & Jolly, 2009 ). A meta-analysis by Hagger, Chatzisarantis ( 2009 ) even highlighted the statistically significant association between subjective norms and self-determination factors. Consequently, this study further explores its application in the context of influencer marketing advertisements on social media.

Subjective norm and self-disclosure willingness

In numerous studies on social media privacy, subjective norms significantly influence an individual’s self-disclosure willingness. Wirth et al. ( 2019 ) based on the privacy calculus theory, surveyed 1,466 participants and found that personal self-disclosure on social media is influenced by the behavioral expectations of other significant reference groups around them. Their research confirmed that subjective norms positively influence self-disclosure of information and highlighted that individuals’ cognitions and behaviors cannot ignore social and environmental factors. Heirman et al. ( 2013 ) in an experiment with Instagram users, also noted that subjective norms could promote positive consumer behavioral responses. Specifically, when important family members and friends highly regard social media influencers as trustworthy, we may also be more inclined to disclose our information to influencers and share this information with our surrounding family and friends without fear of disapproval. In our subjective norms, this is considered a positive and valuable interactive behavior, leading us to exhibit engagement behaviors. Based on this logic, we propose the following research hypotheses:

H11: Subjective norms are positively correlated with self-disclosure willingness.

H11a: Self-disclosure willingness mediates the impact of subjective norms on content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H11b: Self-disclosure willingness mediates the impact of subjective norms on content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H11c: Self-disclosure willingness mediates the impact of subjective norms on content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Subjective norm and information trust

Numerous studies have indicated that subjective norms significantly influence trust (Roh et al., 2022 ). This can be explained by reference group theory, suggesting people tend to minimize the effort expended in decision-making processes, often looking to the behaviors or attitudes of others as a point of reference; for instance, subjective norms can foster acceptance of technology by enhancing trust (Gupta et al., 2021 ). Analogously, if a consumer’s social network generally holds positive attitudes toward influencer advertising, they are also more likely to trust the endorsed advertisement information, as it conserves the extensive effort required in gathering product information (Chetioui et al., 2020 ). Therefore, this paper proposes the following research hypotheses:

H12: Subjective norms are positively correlated with information trust.

H12a: Information trust mediates the impact of subjective norms on content consumption in consumer engagement behavior.

H12b: Information trust mediates the impact of subjective norms on content contribution in consumer engagement behavior.

H12c: Information trust mediates the impact of subjective norms on content creation in consumer engagement behavior.

Conceptual model

In summary, based on the Stimulus (S)-Organism (O)-Response (R) framework, this study constructs the external stimulus factors (S) from three dimensions: influencer factors (parasocial identification, source credibility), advertising information factors (informative value, Ad targeting accuracy), and social influence factors (subjective norms). This is grounded in social capital theory and the theory of planned behavior. drawing on self-determination theory, the current study constructs the individual psychological factors (O) using self-disclosure willingness, innovativeness, and information trust. Finally, the behavioral response (R) is constructed using consumer engagement, which includes content consumption, content contribution, and content creation, as illustrated in Fig. 1 .

Consumer engagement behavior impact model based on SOR framework.

Materials and methods

Participants and procedures.

The current study conducted a survey through the Wenjuanxing platform to collect data. Participants were recruited through social media platforms such as WeChat, Douyin, Weibo et al., as samples drawn from social media users better align with the research purpose of our research and ensure the validity of the sample. Before the survey commenced, all participants were explicitly informed about the purpose of this study, and it was made clear that volunteers could withdraw from the survey at any time. Initially, 600 questionnaires were collected, with 78 invalid responses excluded. The criteria for valid questionnaires were as follows: (1) Respondents must have answered “Yes” to the question, “Do you follow any influencers (internet celebrities) on social media platforms?” as samples not using social media or not following influencers do not meet the study’s objective, making this question a prerequisite for continuing the survey; (2) Respondents had to correctly answer two hidden screening questions within the questionnaire to ensure that they did not randomly select scores; (3) The total time taken to complete the questionnaire had to exceed one minute, ensuring that respondents had sufficient time to understand and thoughtfully answer each question; (4) Respondents were not allowed to choose the same score for eight consecutive questions. Ultimately, 522 valid questionnaires were obtained, with an effective rate of 87.00%, meeting the basic sample size requirements for research models (Gefen et al., 2011 ). Detailed demographic information of the study participants is presented in Table 1 .

Measurements

To ensure the validity and reliability of the data analysis results in this study, the measurement tools and scales used in this chapter were designed with reference to existing established research. The main variables in the survey questionnaire include parasocial identification, source credibility, informative value, ad targeting accuracy, subjective norms, self-disclosure willingness, innovativeness, information trust, content consumption, content contribution, and content creation. The measurement scale for parasocial identification was adapted from the research of Schramm and Hartmann, comprising 6 items (Schramm & Hartmann, 2008 ). The source credibility scale was combined from the studies of Cheung et al. and Luo & Yuan’s research in the context of social media influencer marketing, including 4 items (Cheung et al., 2009 ; Lou & Yuan, 2019 ). The scale for informative value was modified based on Voss et al.‘s research, consisting of 4 items (Voss et al., 2003 ). The ad targeting accuracy scale was derived from the research by Qiu Aimei et al., 2018 ) including 3 items. The subjective norm scale was adapted from Ajzen’s original scale, comprising 3 items (Ajzen, 2002 ). The self-disclosure willingness scale was developed based on Chu and Kim’s research, including 3 items (Chu & Kim, 2011 ). The innovativeness scale was formulated following the study by Sun et al., comprising 4 items (Sun et al., 2006 ). The information trust scale was created in reference to Chu and Choi’s research, including 3 items (Chu & Choi, 2011 ). The scales for the three components of social media consumer engagement—content consumption, content contribution, and content creation—were sourced from the research by Buzeta et al., encompassing 8 items in total (Buzeta et al., 2020 ).

All scales were appropriately revised for the context of social media influencer marketing. To avoid issues with scoring neutral attitudes, a uniform Likert seven-point scale was used for each measurement item (ranging from 1 to 7, representing a spectrum from ‘strongly disagree’ to ‘strongly agree’). After the overall design of the questionnaire was completed, a pre-test was conducted with 30 social media users to ensure that potential respondents could clearly understand the meaning of each question and that there were no obstacles to answering. This pre-test aimed to prevent any difficulties or misunderstandings in the questionnaire items. The final version of the questionnaire is presented in Table 2 .

Data analysis

Since the model framework of the current study is derived from theoretical deductions of existing research and, while logically constructed, does not originate from an existing research model, this study still falls under the category of exploratory research. According to the analysis suggestions of Hair and other scholars, in cases of exploratory research model frameworks, it is more appropriate to choose Smart PLS for Partial Least Squares Path Analysis (PLS) to conduct data analysis and testing of the research model (Hair et al., 2012 ).

Measurement of model

In this study, careful data collection and management resulted in no missing values in the dataset. This ensured the integrity and reliability of the subsequent data analysis. As shown in Table 3 , after deleting measurement items with factor loadings below 0.5, the final factor loadings of the measurement items in this study range from 0.730 to 0.964. This indicates that all measurement items meet the retention criteria. Additionally, the Cronbach’s α values of the latent variables range from 0.805 to 0.924, and all latent variables have Composite Reliability (CR) values greater than the acceptable value of 0.7, demonstrating that the scales of this study have passed the reliability test requirements (Hair et al., 2019 ). All latent variables in this study have Average Variance Extracted (AVE) values greater than the standard acceptance value of 0.5, indicating that the convergent validity of the variables also meets the standard (Fornell & Larcker, 1981 ). Furthermore, the results show that the Variance Inflation Factor (VIF) values for each factor are below 10, indicating that there are no multicollinearity issues with the scales in this study (Hair, 2009 ).

The current study then further verified the discriminant validity of the variables, with specific results shown in Table 4 . The square roots of the average variance extracted (AVE) values for all variables (bolded on the diagonal) are greater than the Pearson correlation coefficients between the variables, indicating that the discriminant validity of the scales in this study meets the required standards (Fornell & Larcker, 1981 ). Additionally, a single-factor test method was employed to examine common method bias in the data. The first unrotated factor accounted for 29.71% of the variance, which is less than the critical threshold of 40%. Therefore, the study passed the test and did not exhibit serious common method bias (Podsakoff et al., 2003 ).

To ensure the robustness and appropriateness of our structural equation model, we also conducted a thorough evaluation of the model fit. Initially, through PLS Algorithm calculations, the R 2 values of each variable were greater than the standard acceptance value of 0.1, indicating good predictive accuracy of the model. Subsequently, Blindfolding calculations were performed, and the results showed that the Stone-Geisser Q 2 values of each variable were greater than 0, demonstrating that the model of this study effectively predicts the relationships between variables (Dijkstra & Henseler, 2015 ). In addition, through CFA, we also obtained some indicator values, specifically, χ 2 /df = 2.528 < 0.3, RMSEA = 0.059 < 0.06, SRMR = 0.055 < 0.08. Given its sensitivity to sample size, we primarily focused on the CFI, TLI, and NFI values, CFI = 0.953 > 0.9, TLI = 0.942 > 0.9, and NFI = 0.923 > 0.9 indicating a good fit. Additionally, RMSEA values below 0.06 and SRMR values below 0.08 were considered indicative of a good model fit. These indices collectively suggested that our model demonstrates a satisfactory fit with the data, thereby reinforcing the validity of our findings.

Research hypothesis testing

The current study employed a Bootstrapping test with a sample size of 5000 on the collected raw data to explore the coefficients and significance of the paths in the research model. The final test data results of this study’s model are presented in Table 5 .

The current study employs S-O-R model as the framework, grounded in theories such as self-determination theory and theory of planned behavior, to construct an influence model of consumer engagement behavior in the context of social media influencer marketing. It examines how influencer factors, advertisement information factors, and social influence factors affect consumer engagement behavior by impacting consumers’ psychological cognitions. Using structural equation modeling to analyze collected data ( N  = 522), it was found that self-disclosure willingness, innovativeness, and information trust positively influence consumer engagement behavior, with innovativeness having the largest impact on higher levels of engagement. Influencer factors, advertisement information factors, and social factors serve as effective external stimuli, influencing psychological motivators and, consequently, consumer engagement behavior. The specific research results are illustrated in Fig. 2 .

Tested structural model of consumer engagement behavior.

The impact of psychological motivators on different levels of consumer engagement: self-disclosure willingness, innovativeness, and information trust

The research analysis indicates that self-disclosure willingness and information trust are key drivers for content consumption (H1a, H2a validated). This aligns with previous findings that individuals with a higher willingness to disclose themselves show greater levels of engagement behavior (Chu et al., 2023 ); likewise, individuals who trust advertisement information are more inclined to engage with advertisement content (Kim, Kim, 2021 ). Moreover, our study finds that information trust has a stronger impact on content consumption, underscoring the importance of trust in the dissemination of advertisement information. However, no significant association was found between individual innovativeness and content consumption (H3a not validated).

Regarding the dimension of content contribution in consumer engagement, self-disclosure willingness, information trust, and innovativeness all positively impact it (H1b, H2b, and H3b all validated). This is consistent with earlier research findings that individuals with higher self-disclosure willingness are more likely to like, comment on, or share content posted by influencers on social media platforms (Towner et al., 2022 ); the conclusions of this paper also support that innovativeness is an important psychological driver for active participation in social media interactions (Kamboj & Sharma, 2023 ). However, at the level of consumer engagement in content contribution, while information trust also exerts a positive effect, its impact is the weakest, although information trust has the strongest impact on content consumption.

In social media advertising, the ideal outcome is the highest level of consumer engagement, i.e., content creation, meaning consumers actively join in brand content creation, seeing themselves as co-creators with the brand (Nadeem et al., 2021 ). Our findings reveal that self-disclosure willingness, innovativeness, and information trust all positively influence content creation (H1c, H2c, and H3c all validated). The analysis found that similar to the impact on content contribution, innovativeness has the most significant effect on encouraging individual content creation, followed by self-disclosure willingness, with information trust having the least impact.

In summary, while some previous studies have shown that self-disclosure willingness, innovativeness, and information trust are important factors in promoting consumer engagement (Chu et al., 2023 ; Nadeem et al., 2021 ; Geng et al., 2021 ), this study goes further by integrating and comparing all three within the same research framework. It was found that to trigger higher levels of consumer engagement behavior, trust is not the most crucial psychological motivator; rather, the most effective method is to stimulate consumers’ innovativeness, thus complementing previous research. Subsequently, this study further explores the impact of different stimulus factors on various psychological motivators.

The influence of external stimulus factors on psychological motivators: influencer factors, advertisement information factors, and social factors

The current findings indicate that influencer factors, such as parasocial identification and source credibility, effectively enhance consumer engagement by influencing self-disclosure willingness and information trust. This aligns with prior research highlighting the significance of parasocial identification (Shan et al., 2020 ). Studies suggest parasocial identification positively impacts consumer engagement by boosting self-disclosure willingness and information trust (validated H4a, H4b, H4c, and H5a), but not content contribution or creation through information trust (H5b, H5c not validated). Source credibility’s influence on self-disclosure willingness was not significant (H6 not validated), thus negating the mediating effect of self-disclosure willingness (H6a, H6b, H6c not validated). Influencer credibility mainly affects engagement through information trust (H7a, H7b, H7c validated), supporting previous findings (Shan et al., 2020 ).

Advertisement factors (informative value and ad targeting accuracy) promote engagement through innovativeness and information trust. Informative value significantly impacts higher-level content contribution and creation through innovativeness (H8b, H8c validated), while ad targeting accuracy influences consumer engagement at all levels mainly through information trust (H10a, H10b, H10c validated).

Social factors (subjective norms) enhance self-disclosure willingness and information trust, consistent with previous research (Wirth et al., 2019 ; Gupta et al., 2021 ), and further promote consumer engagement across all levels (H11a, H11b, H11c, H12a, H12b, and H12c all validated).

In summary, influencer, advertisement, and social factors impact consumer engagement behavior by influencing psychological motivators, with influencer factors having the greatest effect on content consumption, advertisement content factors significantly raising higher-level consumer engagement through innovativeness, and social factors also influencing engagement through self-disclosure willingness and information trust.

Implication

From a theoretical perspective, current research presents a comprehensive model of consumer engagement within the context of influencer advertising on social media. This model not only expands the research horizon in the fields of social media influencer advertising and consumer engagement but also serves as a bridge between two crucial themes in new media advertising studies. Influencer advertising has become an integral part of social media advertising, and the construction of a macro model aids researchers in understanding consumer psychological processes and behavioral patterns. It also assists advertisers in formulating more effective strategies. Consumer engagement, focusing on the active role of consumers in disseminating information and the long-term impact on advertising effectiveness, aligns more closely with the advertising effectiveness measures in the new media context than traditional advertising metrics. However, the intersection of these two vital themes lacks comprehensive research and a universal model. This study constructs a model that elucidates the effects of various stimuli on consumer psychology and engagement behaviors, exploring the connections and mechanisms through different mediating pathways. By differentiating levels of engagement, the study offers more nuanced conclusions for diverse advertising objectives. Furthermore, this research validates the applicability of self-determination theory in the context of influencer advertising effectiveness. While this psychological theory has been utilized in communication behavior research, its effectiveness in the field of advertising requires further exploration. The current study introduces self-determination theory into the realm of influencer advertising and consumer engagement, thereby expanding its application in the field of advertising communication. It also responds to the call from the advertising and marketing academic community to incorporate more psychological theories to explain the ‘black box’ of consumer psychology. The inclusion of this theory re-emphasizes the people-centric approach of this research and highlights the primary role of individuals in advertising communication studies.

From a practical perspective, this study provides significant insights for adapting marketing strategies to the evolving media landscape and the empowered role of audiences. Firstly, in the face of changes in the communication environment and the empowerment of audience communication capabilities, traditional marketing approaches are becoming inadequate for new media advertising needs. Traditional advertising focuses on direct, point-to-point effects, whereas social media advertising aims for broader, point-to-mass communication, leveraging audience proactivity to facilitate the viral spread of content across online social networks. Secondly, for brands, the general influence model proposed in this study offers guidance for influencer advertising strategy. If the goal is to maximize reach and brand recognition with a substantial advertising budget, partnering with top influencers who have a large following can be an effective strategy. However, if the objective is to maximize cost-effectiveness with a limited budget by leveraging consumer initiative for secondary spread, the focus should be on designing advertising content that stimulates consumer creativity and willingness to innovate. Thirdly, influencers are advised to remain true to their followers. In influencer marketing, influencers attract advertisers through their influence over followers, converting this influence into commercial gain. This influence stems from the trust followers place in the influencer, thus influencers should maintain professional integrity and prioritize the quality of information they share, even when presented with advertising opportunities. Lastly, influencers should assert more control over their relationships with advertisers. In traditional advertising, companies and brands often exert significant control over the content. However, in the social media era, influencers should negotiate more creative freedom in their advertising partnerships, asserting a more equal relationship with advertisers. This approach ensures that content quality remains high, maintaining the trust influencers have built with their followers.

Limitations and future directions

while this study offers valuable insights into the dynamics of influencer marketing and consumer engagement on social media, several limitations should be acknowledged: Firstly, constrained by the research objectives and scope, this study’s proposed general impact model covers three dimensions: influencers, advertisement information, and social factors. However, these dimensions are not limited to the five variables discussed in this paper. Therefore, we call for future research to supplement and explore more crucial factors. Secondly, in the actual communication environment, there may be differences in the impact of communication effectiveness across various social media platforms. Thus, future research could also involve comparative studies and explorations between different social media platforms. Thirdly, the current study primarily examines the direct effects of various factors on consumer engagement. However, the potential interaction effects between these variables (e.g., how influencers’ credibility might interact with advertisement information quality) are not extensively explored. Future research could investigate these complex interrelationships for a more holistic understanding. Lastly, our study, being cross-sectional, offers preliminary insights into the complex and dynamic nature of engagement between social media influencers and consumers, yet it does not incorporate the temporal dimension. The diverse impacts of psychological needs on engagement behaviors hint at an underlying dynamism that merits further investigation. Future research should consider employing longitudinal designs to directly observe how these dynamics evolve over time.

The findings of the current study not only theoretically validate the applicability of self-determination theory in the field of social media influencer marketing advertising research but also broaden the scope of advertising effectiveness research from the perspective of consumer engagement. Moreover, the research framework offers strategic guidance and reference for influencer marketing strategies. The main conclusions of this study can be summarized as follows.

Innovativeness is the key factor in high-level consumer engagement behavior. Content contribution represents a higher level of consumer engagement compared to content consumption, as it not only requires consumers to dedicate attention to viewing advertising content but also to share this information across adjacent nodes within their social networks. This dissemination of information is a pivotal factor in the success of influencer marketing advertisements. Hence, companies and brands prioritize consumers’ content contribution over mere viewing of advertising content (Qiu & Kumar, 2017 ). Compared to content consumption and contribution, content creation is considered the highest level of consumer engagement, where consumers actively create and upload brand-related content, and it represents the most advanced outcome sought by enterprises and brands in advertising campaigns (Cheung et al., 2021 ). The current study posits that to pursue better outcomes in social media influencer advertising marketing, enhancing consumers’ willingness for self-disclosure, innovativeness, and trust in advertising information are effective strategies. However, the crux lies in leveraging the consumer’s subjective initiative, particularly in boosting their innovativeness. If the goal is simply to achieve content consumption rather than higher levels of consumer engagement, the focus should be on fostering trust in advertising information. There is no hierarchy in the efficacy of different strategies; they should align with varying marketing contexts and advertising objectives.

The greatest role of social media influencers lies in attracting online traffic. information trust is the core element driving content consumption, and influencer factors mainly affect consumer engagement behaviors through information trust. Therefore, this study suggests that the primary role of influencers in social media advertising is to attract online traffic, i.e., increase consumer behavior regarding ad content consumption (reducing avoidance of ad content), and help brands achieve the initial goal of making consumers “see and complete ads.” However, their impact on further high-level consumer engagement behaviors is limited. This mechanism serves as a reminder to advertisers not to overestimate the effects of influencers in marketing. Currently, top influencers command a significant portion of the ad budget, which could squeeze the budget for other aspects of advertising, potentially affecting the overall effectiveness of the campaign. Businesses and brands should consider deeper strategic implications when planning their advertising campaigns.

Valuing Advertising Information Factors, Content Remains King. Our study posits that in the social media influencer marketing context, the key to enhancing consumer contribution and creation of advertising content lies primarily in the advertising information factors. In other words, while content consumption is important, advertisers should objectively assess the role influencers play in advertising. In the era of social media, content remains ‘king’ in advertising. This view indirectly echoes the points made in the previous paragraph: influencers effectively perform initial ‘online traffic generation’ tasks in social media, but this role should not be overly romanticized or exaggerated. Whether it’s companies, brands, or influencers, providing consumers with advertisements rich in informational value is crucial to achieving better advertising outcomes and potentially converting consumers into stakeholders.

Subjective norm is an unignorable social influence factor. Social media is characterized by its network structure of information dissemination, where a node’s information is visible to adjacent nodes. For instance, if user A likes a piece of content C from influencer I, A’s follower B, who may not follow influencer I, can still see content C via user A’s page. The aim of marketing in the social media era is to influence a node and then spread the information to adjacent nodes, either secondarily or multiple times (Kumar & Panda, 2020 ). According to the Theory of Planned Behavior, an individual’s actions are influenced by significant others in their lives, such as family and friends. Previous studies have proven the effectiveness of the Theory of Planned Behavior in influencing attitudes toward social media advertising (Ranjbarian et al., 2012 ). Current research further confirms that subjective norms also influence consumer engagement behaviors in influencer marketing on social media. Therefore, in advertising practice, brands should not only focus on individual consumers but also invest efforts in groups that can influence consumer decisions. Changing consumer behavior in the era of social media marketing doesn’t solely rely on the company’s efforts.

As communication technology advances, media platforms will further empower individual communicative capabilities, moving beyond the era of the “magic bullet” theory. The distinction between being a recipient and a transmitter of information is increasingly blurred. In an era where everyone is both an audience and an influencer, research confined to the role of the ‘recipient’ falls short of addressing the dynamics of ‘transmission’. Future research in marketing and advertising should thus focus more on the power of individual transmission. Furthermore, as Marshall McLuhan famously said, “the medium is the extension of man.” The evolution of media technology remains human-centric. Accordingly, future marketing research, while paying heed to media transformations, should emphasize the centrality of the ‘human’ element.

Data availability

The datasets generated and/or analyzed during the current study are not publicly available due to privacy issues. Making the full data set publicly available could potentially breach the privacy that was promised to participants when they agreed to take part, and may breach the ethics approval for the study. The data are available from the corresponding author on reasonable request.

Abbasi AZ, Tsiotsou RH, Hussain K, Rather RA, Ting DH (2023) Investigating the impact of social media images’ value, consumer engagement, and involvement on eWOM of a tourism destination: a transmittal mediation approach. J Retail Consum Serv 71:103231. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jretconser.2022.103231

Article   Google Scholar  

Ajzen I (2002) Perceived behavioral control, self‐efficacy, locus of control, and the theory of planned behavior 1. J Appl Soc Psychol 32(4):665–683. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1559-1816.2002.tb00236.x

Ajzen I (1991) The theory of planned behavior. Organ Behav Hum Decis Process 50(2):179–211. https://doi.org/10.1016/0749-5978(91)90020-T

Altman I, Taylor DA (1973) Social penetration: the development of interpersonal relationships. Holt, Rinehart & Winston

Anaya-Sánchez R, Aguilar-Illescas R, Molinillo S, Martínez-López FJ (2020) Trust and loyalty in online brand communities. Span J Mark ESIC 24(2):177–191. https://doi.org/10.1108/SJME-01-2020-0004

Astuti BA, Hariyawan A (2021) Perspectives of social capital and self-determination on e-WOM at millennial generation in Yogyakarta. Integr J Bus Econ 5(1):399475. https://doi.org/10.33019/ijbe.v5i1.338

Bao Z, Wang D (2021) Examining consumer participation on brand microblogs in China: perspectives from elaboration likelihood model, commitment–trust theory and social presence. J Res Interact Mark 15(1):10–29. https://doi.org/10.1108/JRIM-02-2019-0027

Barta S, Belanche D, Fernández A, Flavián M (2023) Influencer marketing on TikTok: the effectiveness of humor and followers’ hedonic experience. J Retail Consum Serv 70:103149. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jretconser.2022.103149

Bond BJ (2016) Following your “friend”: social media and the strength of adolescents’ parasocial relationships with media personae. Cyberpsych Behav Soc Netw 19(11):656–660. https://doi.org/10.1089/cyber.2016.0355

Breves P, Amrehn J, Heidenreich A, Liebers N, Schramm H (2021) Blind trust? The importance and interplay of parasocial relationships and advertising disclosures in explaining influencers’ persuasive effects on their followers. Int J Advert 40(7):1209–1229. https://doi.org/10.1080/02650487.2021.1881237

Brodie RJ, Ilic A, Juric B, Hollebeek L (2013) Consumer engagement in a virtual brand community: an exploratory analysis. J Bus Res 66(1):105–114. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2011.07.029

Buzeta C, De Pelsmacker P, Dens N (2020) Motivations to use different social media types and their impact on consumers’ online brand-related activities (COBRAs). J Interact Mark 52(1):79–98. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.intmar.2020.04.0

Chen KJ, Lin JS, Shan Y (2021) Influencer marketing in China: The roles of parasocial identification, consumer engagement, and inferences of manipulative intent. J Consum Behav 20(6):1436–1448. https://doi.org/10.1002/cb.1945

Chetioui Y, Benlafqih H, Lebdaoui H (2020) How fashion influencers contribute to consumers’ purchase intention. J Fash Mark Manag 24(3):361–380. https://doi.org/10.1108/JFMM-08-2019-0157

Cheung ML, Pires GD, Rosenberger III PJ, De Oliveira MJ (2021) Driving COBRAs: the power of social media marketing. Mark Intell Plan 39(3):361–376. https://doi.org/10.1108/MIP-11-2019-0583

Cheung MY, Luo C, Sia CL, Chen H (2009) Credibility of electronic word-of-mouth: Informational and normative determinants of on-line consumer recommendations. Int J Electron Comm 13(4):9–38. https://doi.org/10.2753/JEC1086-4415130402

Chung S, Cho H (2017) Fostering parasocial relationships with celebrities on social media: Implications for celebrity endorsement. Psychol Mark 34(4):481–495. https://doi.org/10.1002/mar.21001

Chu SC, Choi SM (2011) Electronic word-of-mouth in social networking sites: a cross-cultural study of the United States and China. J Glob Mark 24(3):263–281. https://doi.org/10.1080/08911762.2011.592461

Chu SC, Kim Y (2011) Determinants of consumer engagement in electronic word-of-mouth (eWOM) in social networking sites. Int J Advert 30(1):47–75. https://doi.org/10.2501/IJA-30-1-047-075

Chu TH, Sun M, Crystal Jiang L (2023) Self-disclosure in social media and psychologicalwell-being: a meta-analysis. J Soc Pers Relat 40(2):576–599. https://doi.org/10.1177/02654075221119429

Cropanzano R, Mitchell MS (2005) Social exchange theory: an interdisciplinary review. J Manag 31(6):874–900. https://doi.org/10.1177/0149206305279602

Della Vigna S, Gentzkow M (2010) Persuasion: empirical evidence. Annu Rev Econ 2(1):643–669. https://doi.org/10.1146/annurev.economics.102308.124309

Dijkstra TK, Henseler J (2015) Consistent and asymptotically normal PLS estimators for linear structural equations. Comput Stat Data 81:10–23. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.csda.2014.07.008

Article   MathSciNet   Google Scholar  

Djafarova E, Rushworth C (2017) Exploring the credibility of online celebrities’ Instagram profiles in influencing the purchase decisions of young female users. Comput Hum Behav 68:1–7. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chb.2016.11.009

D Horton D, Richard Wohl R (1956) Mass communication and para-social interaction: Observations on intimacy at a distance. Psychiatry 19(3):215–229. https://doi.org/10.1080/00332747.1956.11023049

Ducoffe RH (1995) How consumers assess the value of advertising. J Curr Issues Res Adver 17(1):1–18. https://doi.org/10.1080/10641734.1995.10505022

Fornell C, Larcker DF (1981) Structural equation models with unobservable variables and measurement error: Algebra and statistics. J Mark Res 18(3):382–388. https://doi.org/10.1177/002224378101800313

Gefen D, Straub DW, Rigdon EE (2011) An update and extension to SEM guidelines for administrative and social science research. Mis Quart 35(2):iii–xiv. https://doi.org/10.2307/23044042

Geng S, Yang P, Gao Y, Tan Y, Yang C (2021) The effects of ad social and personal relevance on consumer ad engagement on social media: the moderating role of platform trust. Comput Hum Behav 122:106834. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chb.2021.106834

Giles DC (2002) Parasocial interaction: a review of the literature and a model for future research. Media Psychol 4(3):279–305. https://doi.org/10.1207/S1532785XMEP0403_04

Gräve JF, Bartsch F (2022) # Instafame: exploring the endorsement effectiveness of influencers compared to celebrities. Int J Advert 41(4):591–622. https://doi.org/10.1080/02650487.2021.1987041

Gupta R, Ranjan S, Gupta A (2021) Consumer’s perceived trust and subjective norms as antecedents of mobile wallets adoption and continuance intention: a technology acceptance approach. Recent Adv Technol Accept Models Theor 211–224. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-64987-6_13

Habibi MR, Laroche M, Richard MO (2014) The roles of brand community and community engagement in building brand trust on social media. Comput Hum Behav 37:152–161. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chb.2014.04.016

Hagger MS, Chatzisarantis NL (2009) Integrating the theory of planned behaviour and self‐determination theory in health behaviour: a meta‐analysis. Brit J Health Psych 14(2):275–302. https://doi.org/10.1348/135910708X373959

Haida A, Rahim HL (2015) Social media advertising value: A Study on consumer’s perception. Int Acad Res J Bus Technol 1(1):1–8. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/280325676_Social_Media_Advertising_Value_A_Study_on_Consumer%27s_Perception

Google Scholar  

Hair JF (2009) Multivariate data analysis. Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River

Hair JF, Ringle CM, Gudergan SP, Fischer A, Nitzl C, Menictas C (2019) Partial least squares structural equation modeling-based discrete choice modeling: an illustration in modeling retailer choice. Bus Res 12(1):115–142. https://doi.org/10.1007/s40685-018-0072-4

Hair JF, Sarstedt M, Ringle CM, Mena JA (2012) An assessment of the use of partial least squares structural equation modeling in marketing research. Acad Mark Sci 40:414–433. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11747-011-0261-6

Heirman W, Walrave M, Ponnet K (2013) Predicting adolescents’ disclosure of personal information in exchange for commercial incentives: An application of an extended theory of planned behavior. Cyberpsych Behav Soc Netw16(2):81–87. https://doi.org/10.1089/cyber.2012.0041

Hewei T, Youngsook L (2022) Factors affecting continuous purchase intention of fashion products on social E-commerce: SOR model and the mediating effect. Entertain Comput 41:100474. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.entcom.2021.100474

Hovland CI, Janis IL, Kelley HH (1953) Communication and persuasion. Yale University Press

Hsieh JK, Li YJ (2020) Will you ever trust the review website again? The importance of source credibility. Int J Electron Commerce 24(2):255–275. https://doi.org/10.1080/10864415.2020.1715528

Huang YC (2023) Integrated concepts of the UTAUT and TPB in virtual reality behavioral intention. J Retail Consum Serv 70:103127. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jretconser.2022.103127

Hudders L, Lou C (2023) The rosy world of influencer marketing? Its bright and dark sides, and future research recommendations. Int J Advert 42(1):151–161. https://doi.org/10.1080/02650487.2022.2137318

Itani OS, Kalra A, Riley J (2022) Complementary effects of CRM and social media on customer co-creation and sales performance in B2B firms: The role of salesperson self-determination needs. Inf Manag 59(3):103621. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.im.2022.103621

Jang W, Kim J, Kim S, Chun JW (2021) The role of engagement in travel influencer marketing: the perspectives of dual process theory and the source credibility model. Curr Issues Tour 24(17):2416–2420. https://doi.org/10.1080/13683500.2020.1845126

Jin SV, Ryu E, Muqaddam A (2021) I trust what she’s# endorsing on Instagram: moderating effects of parasocial interaction and social presence in fashion influencer marketing. J Fash Mark Manag 25(4):665–681. https://doi.org/10.1108/JFMM-04-2020-0059

Kamboj S, Sharma M (2023) Social media adoption behaviour: consumer innovativeness and participation intention. Int J Consum Stud 47(2):523–544. https://doi.org/10.1111/ijcs.12848

Kaushik AK, Rahman Z (2014) Perspectives and dimensions of consumer innovativeness: a literature review and future agenda. J Int Consum Mark 26(3):239–263. https://doi.org/10.1080/08961530.2014.893150

Kelley JB, Alden DL (2016) Online brand community: through the eyes of self-determination theory. Internet Res 26(4):790–808. https://doi.org/10.1108/IntR-01-2015-0017

K Kim DY, Kim HY (2021) Trust me, trust me not: A nuanced view of influencer marketing on social media. J Bus Res 134:223–232. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2021.05.024

Koay KY, Ong DLT, Khoo KL, Yeoh HJ (2020) Perceived social media marketing activities and consumer-based brand equity: Testing a moderated mediation model. Asia Pac J Mark Logist 33(1):53–72. https://doi.org/10.1108/APJML-07-2019-0453

Kumar S, Panda BS (2020) Identifying influential nodes in Social Networks: Neighborhood Coreness based voting approach. Phys A: Stat Mech Appl 553:124215. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.physa.2020.124215

Lee D, Hosanagar K, Nair HS (2018) Advertising content and consumer engagement on social media: evidence from Facebook. Manag Sci 64(11):5105–5131. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.2017.2902

Lee DH, Im S, Taylor CR (2008) Voluntary self‐disclosure of information on the Internet: a multimethod study of the motivations and consequences of disclosing information on blogs. Psychol Mark 25(7):692–710. https://doi.org/10.1002/mar.20232

Lee J, Rajtmajer S, Srivatsavaya E, Wilson S (2023) Online self-disclosure, social support, and user engagement during the COVID-19 pandemic. ACM Trans Soc Comput 6(3-4):1–31. https://doi.org/10.1145/3617654

Lee Y, Lee J, Hwang Y (2015) Relating motivation to information and communication technology acceptance: self-determination theory perspective. Comput Hum Behav 51:418–428. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chb.2015.05.021

Leite FP, Baptista PDP (2022) The effects of social media influencers’ self-disclosure on behavioral intentions: The role of source credibility, parasocial relationships, and brand trust. J Mark Theory Pr 30(3):295–311. https://doi.org/10.1080/10696679.2021.1935275

Leite FP, Pontes N, de Paula Baptista P (2022) Oops, I’ve overshared! When social media influencers’ self-disclosure damage perceptions of source credibility. Comput Hum Behav 133:107274. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chb.2022.107274

León SP, Abad MJ, Rosas JM (2009) Giving contexts informative value makes information context-specific. Exp Psychol. https://doi.org/10.1027/1618-3169/a000006

Lou C, Tan SS, Chen X (2019) Investigating consumer engagement with influencer-vs. brand-promoted ads: The roles of source and disclosure. J Interact Advert 19(3):169–186. https://doi.org/10.1080/15252019.2019.1667928

Lou C, Yuan S (2019) Influencer marketing: how message value and credibility affect consumer trust of branded content on social media. J Interact Advert 19(1):58–73. https://doi.org/10.1080/15252019.2018.1533501

Luo M, Hancock JT (2020) Self-disclosure and social media: motivations, mechanisms and psychological well-being. Curr Opin Psychol 31:110–115. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.copsyc.2019.08.019

Article   PubMed   Google Scholar  

Mahmood S, Khwaja MG, Jusoh A (2019) Electronic word of mouth on social media websites: role of social capital theory, self-determination theory, and altruism. Int J Space-Based Situat Comput 9(2):74–89. https://doi.org/10.1504/IJSSC.2019.104217

Majerczak P, Strzelecki A (2022) Trust, media credibility, social ties, and the intention to share towards information verification in an age of fake news. Behav Sci 12(2):51. https://doi.org/10.3390/bs12020051

Article   PubMed   PubMed Central   Google Scholar  

McAllister DJ (1995) Affect-and cognition-based trust as foundations for interpersonal cooperation in organizations. Acad Manag J 38(1):24–59. https://doi.org/10.5465/256727

Mehrabian A, Russell JA (1974). An approach to environmental psychology. The MIT Press

Minton EA (2015) In advertising we trust: Religiosity’s influence on marketplace and relational trust. J Advert 44(4):403–414. https://doi.org/10.1080/00913367.2015.1033572

Moorman C, Deshpande R, Zaltman G (1993) Factors affecting trust in market research relationships. J Mark 57(1):81–101. https://doi.org/10.1177/002224299305700106

Muntinga DG, Moorman M, Smit EG (2011) Introducing COBRAs: Exploring motivations for brand-related social media use. Int J Advert 30(1):13–46. https://doi.org/10.2501/IJA-30-1-013-046

Nadeem W, Tan TM, Tajvidi M, Hajli N (2021) How do experiences enhance brand relationship performance and value co-creation in social commerce? The role of consumer engagement and self brand-connection. Technol Forecast Soc 171:120952. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.techfore.2021.120952

Oestreicher-Singer G, Zalmanson L (2013) Content or community? A digital business strategy for content providers in the social age. MIS Quart 37(2):591–616. https://www.jstor.org/stable/43825924

Okazaki S (2009) Social influence model and electronic word of mouth: PC versus mobile internet. Int J Advert 28(3):439–472. https://doi.org/10.2501/S0265048709200692

Piehler R, Schade M, Kleine-Kalmer B, Burmann C (2019) Consumers’ online brand-related activities (COBRAs) on SNS brand pages: an investigation of consuming, contributing and creating behaviours of SNS brand page followers. Eur J Mark 53(9):1833–1853. https://doi.org/10.1108/EJM-10-2017-0722

Podsakoff PM, MacKenzie SB, Lee JY, Podsakoff NP (2003) Common method biases in behavioral research: a critical review of the literature and recommended remedies. J Appl Psychol 88(5):879. https://doi.org/10.1037/0021-9010.88.5.879

Pop RA, Săplăcan Z, Dabija DC, Alt MA (2022) The impact of social media influencers on travel decisions: The role of trust in consumer decision journey. Curr Issues Tour 25(5):823–843. https://doi.org/10.1080/13683500.2021.1895729

Pradhan B, Kishore K, Gokhale N (2023) Social media influencers and consumer engagement: a review and future research agenda. Int J Consum Stud 47(6):2106–2130. https://doi.org/10.1111/ijcs.12901

Qiu A, Chen M (2018) 基于UTAUT修正模型的微信朋友圈广告接受意愿分析 [Analysis of WeChat moments advertising acceptance intention based on a modified UTAUT model]. Stat Decis 34(12):99–102. https://doi.org/10.13546/j.cnki.tjyjc.2018.12.024

Qiu L, Kumar S (2017) Understanding voluntary knowledge provision and content contribution through a social-media-based prediction market: a field experiment. Inf Syst Res 28(3):529–546. https://doi.org/10.1287/isre.2016.0679

Racherla P, Mandviwalla M, Connolly DJ (2012) Factors affecting consumers’ trust in online product reviews. J Consum Behav 11(2):94–104. https://doi.org/10.1002/cb.385

Ranjbarian B, Gharibpoor M, Lari A (2012) Attitude toward SMS advertising and derived behavioral intension, an empirical study using TPB (SEM method). J Am Sci 8(7):297–307. https://www.ceeol.com/search/article-detail?id=466212

Robertshaw GS, Marr NE (2006) The implications of incomplete and spurious personal information disclosures for direct marketing practice. J Database Mark Custom Strategy Manag. 13:186–197. https://doi.org/10.1057/palgrave.dbm.3240296

Roh T, Seok J, Kim Y (2022) Unveiling ways to reach organic purchase: Green perceived value, perceived knowledge, attitude, subjective norm, and trust. J Retail Consum Serv 67:102988. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jretconser.2022.102988

Schivinski B, Christodoulides G, Dabrowski D (2016) Measuring consumers’ engagement with brand-related social-media content: Development and validation of a scale that identifies levels of social-media engagement with brands. J Advert Res 56(1):64–80. https://doi.org/10.2501/JAR-2016-004

Schouten AP, Janssen L, Verspaget M (2021) Celebrity vs. Influencer endorsements in advertising: the role of identification, credibility, and product-endorser fit. Leveraged marketing communications, Routledge. pp. 208–231

Schramm H, Hartmann T (2008) The PSI-Process Scales. A new measure to assess the intensity and breadth of parasocial processes. Communications. https://doi.org/10.1515/COMM.2008.025

Shan Y, Chen KJ, Lin JS (2020) When social media influencers endorse brands: the effects of self-influencer congruence, parasocial identification, and perceived endorser motive. Int J Advert 39(5):590–610. https://doi.org/10.1080/02650487.2019.1678322

Shi Y (2018) The impact of consumer innovativeness on the intention of clicking on SNS advertising. Mod Econ 9(2):278–285. https://doi.org/10.4236/me.2018.92018

Article   CAS   Google Scholar  

Simon F, Tossan V (2018) Does brand-consumer social sharing matter? A relational framework of customer engagement to brand-hosted social media. J Bus Res 85:175–184. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jbusres.2017.12.050

Steinhoff L, Arli D, Weaven S, Kozlenkova IV (2019) Online relationship marketing. J Acad Mark Sci 47:369–393. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11747-018-0621-6

Stutzman F, Capra R, Thompson J (2011) Factors mediating disclosure in social network sites. Comput Hum Behav 27(1):590–598. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.chb.2010.10.017

Sun T, Youn S, Wu G, Kuntaraporn M (2006) Online word-of-mouth (or mouse): An exploration of its antecedents and consequences. J Comput-Mediat Comm 11(4):1104–1127. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1083-6101.2006.00310.x

Sweet KS, LeBlanc JK, Stough LM, Sweany NW (2020) Community building and knowledge sharing by individuals with disabilities using social media. J Comput Assist Lear 36(1):1–11. https://doi.org/10.1111/jcal.12377

Tak P, Gupta M (2021) Examining travel mobile app attributes and its impact on consumer engagement: An application of SOR framework. J Internet Commer 20(3):293–318. https://doi.org/10.1080/15332861.2021.1891517

Towner E, Grint J, Levy T, Blakemore SJ, Tomova L (2022) Revealing the self in a digital world: a systematic review of adolescent online and offline self-disclosure. Curr Opin Psychol 45:101309. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.copsyc.2022.101309

Vander Schee BA, Peltier J, Dahl AJ (2020) Antecedent consumer factors, consequential branding outcomes and measures of online consumer engagement: current research and future directions. J Res Interact Mark 14(2):239–268. https://doi.org/10.1108/JRIM-01-2020-0010

Van-Tien Dao W, Nhat Hanh Le A, Ming-Sung Cheng J, Chao Chen D (2014) Social media advertising value: The case of transitional economies in Southeast Asia. Int J Advert 33(2):271–294. https://doi.org/10.2501/IJA-33-2-271-294

Viswanathan V, Hollebeek LD, Malthouse EC, Maslowska E, Jung Kim S, Xie W (2017) The dynamics of consumer engagement with mobile technologies. Serv Sci 9(1):36–49. https://doi.org/10.1287/serv.2016.0161

Voss KE, Spangenberg ER, Grohmann B (2003) Measuring the hedonic and utilitarian dimensions of consumer attitude. J Mark Res 40(3):310–320. https://doi.org/10.1509/jmkr.40.3.310.19238

Vrontis D, Makrides A, Christofi M, Thrassou A (2021) Social media influencer marketing: A systematic review, integrative framework and future research agenda. Int J Consum Stud 45(4):617–644. https://doi.org/10.1111/ijcs.12647

Wang T, Yeh RKJ, Chen C, Tsydypov Z (2016) What drives electronic word-of-mouth on social networking sites? Perspectives of social capital and self-determination. Telemat Inf 33(4):1034–1047. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.tele.2016.03.005

Watson JB (1917) An Attempted formulation of the scope of behavior psychology. Psychol Rev 24(5):329. https://doi.org/10.1037/h0073044

Wehmeyer ML (1999) A functional model of self-determination: Describing development and implementing instruction. Focus Autism Dev Dis 14(1):53–61. https://www.imdetermined.org/wp-content/uploads/2018/06/SD5_A-Functional-Model-of.pdf

Wei X, Chen H, Ramirez A, Jeon Y, Sun Y (2022) Influencers as endorsers and followers as consumers: exploring the role of parasocial relationship, congruence, and followers’ identifications on consumer–brand engagement. J Interact Advert 22(3):269–288. https://doi.org/10.1080/15252019.2022.2116963

Wirth J, Maier C, Laumer S (2019) Subjective norm and the privacy calculus: explaining self-disclosure on social networking sites. Paper presented at the 27th European Conference on Information Systems (ECIS). Stockholm & Uppsala, Sweden, 8–14, June 2019 https://aisel.aisnet.org/ecis2019_rp

Xiao L, Li X, Zhang Y (2023) Exploring the factors influencing consumer engagement behavior regarding short-form video advertising: a big data perspective. J Retail Consum Serv 70:103170. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jretconser.2022.103170

Yang J, Peng MYP, Wong S, Chong W (2021) How E-learning environmental stimuli influence determinates of learning engagement in the context of COVID-19? SOR model perspective. Front Psychol 12:584976. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2021.584976

Yang K, Jolly LD (2009) The effects of consumer perceived value and subjective norm on mobile data service adoption between American and Korean consumers. J Retail Consum Serv 16(6):502–508. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jretconser.2009.08.005

Yang S, Zhou S, Cheng X (2019) Why do college students continue to use mobile learning? Learning involvement and self‐determination theory. Brit J Educ Technol 50(2):626–637. https://doi.org/10.1111/bjet.12634

Yusuf AS, Busalim AH (2018) Influence of e-WOM engagement on consumer purchase intention in social commerce. J Serv Mark 32(4):493–504. https://doi.org/10.1108/JSM-01-2017-0031

Zhang G, Yue X, Ye Y, Peng MYP (2021) Understanding the impact of the psychological cognitive process on student learning satisfaction: combination of the social cognitive career theory and SOR model. Front Psychol 12:712323. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2021.712323

Zhang J, Liu J, Zhong W (2019) 广告精准度与广告效果:基于隐私关注的现场实验 [Ad targeting accuracy and advertising effectiveness: a field experiment based on privacy concerns]. Manag Sci 32(06):123–132

CAS   Google Scholar  

Download references

Acknowledgements

The authors thank all the participants of this study. The participants were all informed about the purpose and content of the study and voluntarily agreed to participate. The participants were able to stop participating at any time without penalty. Funding for this study was provided by Minjiang University Research Start-up Funds (No. 324-32404314).

Author information

Authors and affiliations.

School of Journalism and Communication, Minjiang University, Fuzhou, China

School of Journalism and Communication, Shanghai University, Shanghai, China

Qiuting Duan

You can also search for this author in PubMed   Google Scholar

Contributions

Conceptualization: CG; methodology: CG and QD; software: CG and QD; validation: CG; formal analysis: CG and QD; investigation: CG and QD; resources: CG; data curation: CG and QD; writing—original draft preparation: CG; writing—review and editing: CG; visualization: CG; project administration: CG. All authors have read and agreed to the published version of the manuscript.

Corresponding author

Correspondence to Chenyu Gu .

Ethics declarations

Competing interests.

The authors declare no competing interests.

Ethical approval

The questionnaire and methodology for this study were approved by the School of Journalism and Communication, Minjiang University, Committee on Ethical Research (No. MJUCER20230621). The procedures used in this study adhere to the tenets of the Declaration of Helsinki.

Informed consent

Informed consent was obtained from all participants and/or their legal guardians.

Additional information

Publisher’s note Springer Nature remains neutral with regard to jurisdictional claims in published maps and institutional affiliations.

Supplementary information

Rights and permissions.

Open Access This article is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License, which permits use, sharing, adaptation, distribution and reproduction in any medium or format, as long as you give appropriate credit to the original author(s) and the source, provide a link to the Creative Commons licence, and indicate if changes were made. The images or other third party material in this article are included in the article’s Creative Commons licence, unless indicated otherwise in a credit line to the material. If material is not included in the article’s Creative Commons licence and your intended use is not permitted by statutory regulation or exceeds the permitted use, you will need to obtain permission directly from the copyright holder. To view a copy of this licence, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/ .

Reprints and permissions

About this article

Cite this article.

Gu, C., Duan, Q. Exploring the dynamics of consumer engagement in social media influencer marketing: from the self-determination theory perspective. Humanit Soc Sci Commun 11 , 587 (2024). https://doi.org/10.1057/s41599-024-03127-w

Download citation

Received : 17 December 2023

Accepted : 23 April 2024

Published : 08 May 2024

DOI : https://doi.org/10.1057/s41599-024-03127-w

Share this article

Anyone you share the following link with will be able to read this content:

Sorry, a shareable link is not currently available for this article.

Provided by the Springer Nature SharedIt content-sharing initiative

Quick links

• Explore articles by subject
• Guide to authors
• Editorial policies

• Open access
• Published: 14 May 2024

Protocol for a scoping review study on learning plan use in undergraduate medical education

• Anna Romanova   ORCID: orcid.org/0000-0003-1118-1604 1 ,
• Claire Touchie 1 ,
• Sydney Ruller 2 ,
• Victoria Cole 3 &
• Susan Humphrey-Murto 4  

Systematic Reviews volume  13 , Article number:  131 ( 2024 ) Cite this article

Metrics details

The current paradigm of competency-based medical education and learner-centredness requires learners to take an active role in their training. However, deliberate and planned continual assessment and performance improvement is hindered by the fragmented nature of many medical training programs. Attempts to bridge this continuity gap between supervision and feedback through learner handover have been controversial. Learning plans are an alternate educational tool that helps trainees identify their learning needs and facilitate longitudinal assessment by providing supervisors with a roadmap of their goals. Informed by self-regulated learning theory, learning plans may be the answer to track trainees’ progress along their learning trajectory. The purpose of this study is to summarise the literature regarding learning plan use specifically in undergraduate medical education and explore the student’s role in all stages of learning plan development and implementation.

Following Arksey and O’Malley’s framework, a scoping review will be conducted to explore the use of learning plans in undergraduate medical education. Literature searches will be conducted using multiple databases by a librarian with expertise in scoping reviews. Through an iterative process, inclusion and exclusion criteria will be developed and a data extraction form refined. Data will be analysed using quantitative and qualitative content analyses.

By summarising the literature on learning plan use in undergraduate medical education, this study aims to better understand how to support self-regulated learning in undergraduate medical education. The results from this project will inform future scholarly work in competency-based medical education at the undergraduate level and have implications for improving feedback and supporting learners at all levels of competence.

Scoping review registration:

Open Science Framework osf.io/wvzbx.

Peer Review reports

Competency-based medical education (CBME) has transformed the approach to medical education to focus on demonstration of acquired competencies rather than time-based completion of rotations [ 1 ]. As a result, undergraduate and graduate medical training programs worldwide have adopted outcomes-based assessments in the form of entrustable professional activities (EPAs) comprised of competencies to be met [ 2 ]. These assessments are completed longitudinally by multiple different evaluators to generate an overall impression of a learner’s competency.

In CBME, trainees will progress along their learning trajectory at individual speeds and some may excel while others struggle to achieve the required knowledge, skills or attitudes. Therefore, deliberate and planned continual assessment and performance improvement is required. However, due to the fragmented nature of many medical training programs where learners rotate through different rotations and work with many supervisors, longitudinal observation is similarly fragmented. This makes it difficult to determine where trainees are on their learning trajectories and can affect the quality of feedback provided to them, which is a known major influencer of academic achievement [ 3 ]. As a result, struggling learners may not be identified until late in their training and the growth of high-performing learners may be stifled [ 4 , 5 , 6 ].

Bridging this continuity gap between supervision and feedback through some form of learner handover or forward feeding has been debated since the 1970s and continues to this day [ 5 , 7 , 8 , 9 , 10 , 11 ]. The goal of learner handover is to improve trainee assessment and feedback by sharing their performance and learning needs between supervisors or across rotations. However, several concerns have been raised about this approach including that it could inappropriately bias subsequent assessments of the learner’s abilities [ 9 , 11 , 12 ]. A different approach to keeping track of trainees’ learning goals and progress along their learning trajectories is required. Learning plans (LPs) informed by self-regulated learning (SRL) theory may be the answer.

SRL has been defined as a cyclical process where learners actively control their thoughts, actions and motivation to achieve their goals [ 13 ]. Several models of SRL exist but all entail that the trainee is responsible for setting, planning, executing, monitoring and reflecting on their learning goals [ 13 ]. According to Zimmerman’s SRL model, this process occurs in three stages: forethought phase before an activity, performance phase during an activity and self-reflection phase after an activity [ 13 ]. Since each trainee leads their own learning process and has an individual trajectory towards competence, this theory relates well to the CBME paradigm which is grounded in learner-centredness [ 1 ]. However, we know that medical students and residents have difficulty identifying their own learning goals and therefore need guidance to effectively partake in SRL [ 14 , 15 , 16 , 17 ]. Motivation has also emerged as a key component of SRL, and numerous studies have explored factors that influence student engagement in learning [ 18 , 19 ]. In addition to meeting their basic psychological needs of autonomy, relatedness and competence, perceived learning relevance through meaningful learning activities has been shown to increase trainee engagement in their learning [ 19 ].

LPs are a well-known tool across many educational fields including CBME that can provide trainees with meaningful learning activities since they help them direct their own learning goals in a guided fashion [ 20 ]. Also known as personal learning plans, learning contracts, personal action plans, personal development plans, and learning goals, LPs are documents that outline the learner’s roadmap to achieve their learning goals. They require the learner to self-identify what they need to learn and why, how they are going to do it, how they will know when they are finished, define the timeframe for goal achievement and assess the impact of their learning [ 20 ]. In so doing, LPs give more autonomy to the learner and facilitate objective and targeted feedback from supervisors. This approach has been described as “most congruent with the assumptions we make about adults as learners” [ 21 ].

LP use has been explored across various clinical settings and at all levels of medical education; however, most of the experience lies in postgraduate medical education [ 22 ]. Medical students are a unique learner population with learning needs that appear to be very well suited for using LPs for two main reasons. First, their education is often divided between classroom and clinical settings. During clinical training, students need to be more independent in setting learning goals to meet desired competencies as their education is no longer outlined for them in a detailed fashion by the medical school curriculum [ 23 ]. SRL in the workplace is also different than in the classroom due to additional complexities of clinical care that can impact students’ ability to self-regulate their learning [ 24 ]. Second, although most medical trainees have difficulty with goal setting, medical students in particular need more guidance compared to residents due to their relative lack of experience upon which they can build within the SRL framework [ 25 ]. LPs can therefore provide much-needed structure to their learning but should be guided by an experienced tutor to be effective [ 15 , 24 ].

LPs fit well within the learner-centred educational framework of CBME by helping trainees identify their learning needs and facilitating longitudinal assessment by providing supervisors with a roadmap of their goals. In so doing, they can address current issues with learner handover and identification as well as remediation of struggling learners. Moreover, they have the potential to help trainees develop lifelong skills with respect to continuing professional development after graduation which is required by many medical licensing bodies.

An initial search of the JBI Database, Cochrane Database, MEDLINE (PubMed) and Google Scholar conducted in July–August 2022 revealed a paucity of research on LP use in undergraduate medical education (UGME). A related systematic review by van Houten–Schat et al. [ 24 ] on SRL in the clinical setting identified three interventions used by medical students and residents in SRL—coaching, LPs and supportive tools. However, only a couple of the included studies looked specifically at medical students’ use of LPs, so this remains an area in need of more exploration. A scoping review would provide an excellent starting point to map the body of literature on this topic.

The objective of this scoping review will therefore be to explore LP use in UGME. In doing so, it will address a gap in knowledge and help determine additional areas for research.

This study will follow Arksey and O’Malley’s [ 26 ] five-step framework for scoping review methodology. It will not include the optional sixth step which entails stakeholder consultation as relevant stakeholders will be intentionally included in the research team (a member of UGME leadership, a medical student and a first-year resident).

Step 1—Identifying the research question

The overarching purpose of this study is to “explore the use of LPs in UGME”. More specifically we seek to achieve the following:

Summarise the literature regarding the use of LPs in UGME (including context, students targeted, frameworks used)

Explore the role of the student in all stages of the LP development and implementation

Determine existing research gaps

Step 2—Identifying relevant studies

An experienced health sciences librarian (VC) will conduct all searches and develop the initial search strategy. The preliminary search strategy is shown in Appendix A (see Additional file 2). Articles will be included if they meet the following criteria [ 27 ]:

Participants

Medical students enrolled at a medical school at the undergraduate level.

Any use of LPs by medical students. LPs are defined as a document, usually presented in a table format, that outlines the learner’s roadmap to achieve their learning goals [ 20 ].

Any stage of UGME in any geographic setting.

Types of evidence sources

We will search existing published and unpublished (grey) literature. This may include research studies, reviews, or expert opinion pieces.

Search strategy

With the assistance of an experienced librarian (VC), a pilot search will be conducted to inform the final search strategy. A search will be conducted in the following electronic databases: MEDLINE, Embase, Education Source, APA PsycInfo and Web of Science. The search terms will be developed in consultation with the research team and librarian. The search strategy will proceed according to the JBI Manual for Evidence Synthesis three-step search strategy for reviews [ 27 ]. First, we will conduct a limited search in two appropriate online databases and analyse text words from the title, abstracts and index terms of relevant papers. Next, we will conduct a second search using all identified key words in all databases. Third, we will review reference lists of all included studies to identify further relevant studies to include in the review. We will also contact the authors of relevant papers for further information if required. This will be an iterative process as the research team becomes more familiar with the literature and will be guided by the librarian. Any modifications to the search strategy as it evolves will be described in the scoping review report. As a measure of rigour, the search strategy will be peer-reviewed by another librarian using the PRESS checklist [ 28 ]. No language or date limits will be applied.

Step 3—Study selection

The screening process will consist of a two-step approach: screening titles/abstracts and, if they meet inclusion criteria, this will be followed by a full-text review. All screening will be done by two members of the research team and any disagreements will be resolved by an independent third member of the team. Based on preliminary inclusion criteria, the whole research team will first pilot the screening process by reviewing a random sample of 25 titles/abstracts. The search strategy, eligibility criteria and study objectives will be refined in an iterative process. We anticipate several meetings as the topic is not well described in the literature. A flowchart of the review process will be generated. Any modifications to the study selection process will be described in the scoping review report. The papers will be excluded if a full text is not available. The search results will be managed using Covidence software.

Step 4—Charting the data

A preliminary data extraction tool is shown in Appendix B (see Additional file 3 ). Data will be extracted into Excel and will include demographic information and specific details about the population, concept, context, study methods and outcomes as they relate to the scoping review objectives. The whole research team will pilot the data extraction tool on ten articles selected for full-text review. Through an iterative process, the final data extraction form will be refined. Subsequently, two members of the team will independently extract data from all articles included for full-text review using this tool. Charting disagreements will be resolved by the principal and senior investigators. Google Translate will be used for any included articles that are not in the English language.

Step 5—Collating, summarising and reporting the results

Quantitative and qualitative analyses will be used to summarise the results. Quantitative analysis will capture descriptive statistics with details about the population, concept, context, study methods and outcomes being examined in this scoping review. Qualitative content analysis will enable interpretation of text data through the systematic classification process of coding and identifying themes and patterns [ 29 ]. Several team meetings will be held to review potential themes to ensure an accurate representation of the data. The PRISMA Extension for Scoping Reviews (PRISMA-ScR) will be used to guide the reporting of review findings [ 30 ]. Data will be presented in tables and/or diagrams as applicable. A descriptive summary will explain the presented results and how they relate to the scoping review objectives.

By summarising the literature on LP use in UGME, this study will contribute to a better understanding of how to support SRL amongst medical students. The results from this project will also inform future scholarly work in CBME at the undergraduate level and have implications for improving feedback as well as supporting learners at all levels of competence. In doing so, this study may have practical applications by informing learning plan incorporation into CBME-based curricula.

We do not anticipate any practical or operational issues at this time. We assembled a team with the necessary expertise and tools to complete this project.

Availability of data and materials

All data generated or analysed during this study will be included in the published scoping review article.

Abbreviations

• Competency-based medical education

Entrustable professional activity

• Learning plan
• Self-regulated learning
• Undergraduate medical education

Frank JR, Snell LS, Cate OT, et al. Competency-based medical education: theory to practice. Med Teach. 2010;32(8):638–45.

Article   PubMed   Google Scholar  

Shorey S, Lau TC, Lau ST, Ang E. Entrustable professional activities in health care education: a scoping review. Med Educ. 2019;53(8):766–77.

Hattie J, Timperley H. The power of feedback. Rev Educ Res. 2007;77(1):81–112.

Article   Google Scholar  

Dudek NL, Marks MB, Regehr G. Failure to fail: the perspectives of clinical supervisors. Acad Med. 2005;80(10 Suppl):S84–7.

Warm EJ, Englander R, Pereira A, Barach P. Improving learner handovers in medical education. Acad Med. 2017;92(7):927–31.

Spooner M, Duane C, Uygur J, et al. Self-regulatory learning theory as a lens on how undergraduate and postgraduate learners respond to feedback: a BEME scoping review : BEME Guide No. 66. Med Teach. 2022;44(1):3–18.

Frellsen SL, Baker EA, Papp KK, Durning SJ. Medical school policies regarding struggling medical students during the internal medicine clerkships: results of a National Survey. Acad Med. 2008;83(9):876–81.

Humphrey-Murto S, LeBlanc A, Touchie C, et al. The influence of prior performance information on ratings of current performance and implications for learner handover: a scoping review. Acad Med. 2019;94(7):1050–7.

Morgan HK, Mejicano GC, Skochelak S, et al. A responsible educational handover: improving communication to improve learning. Acad Med. 2020;95(2):194–9.

Dory V, Danoff D, Plotnick LH, et al. Does educational handover influence subsequent assessment? Acad Med. 2021;96(1):118–25.

Humphrey-Murto S, Lingard L, Varpio L, et al. Learner handover: who is it really for? Acad Med. 2021;96(4):592–8.

Shaw T, Wood TJ, Touchie T, Pugh D, Humphrey-Murto S. How biased are you? The effect of prior performance information on attending physician ratings and implications for learner handover. Adv Health Sci Educ Theory Pract. 2021;26(1):199–214.

Artino AR, Brydges R, Gruppen LD. Chapter 14: Self-regulated learning in health professional education: theoretical perspectives and research methods. In: Cleland J, Duning SJ, editors. Researching Medical Education. 1st ed. John Wiley & Sons; 2015. p. 155–66.

Chapter   Google Scholar  

Cleland J, Arnold R, Chesser A. Failing finals is often a surprise for the student but not the teacher: identifying difficulties and supporting students with academic difficulties. Med Teach. 2005;27(6):504–8.

Reed S, Lockspeiser TM, Burke A, et al. Practical suggestions for the creation and use of meaningful learning goals in graduate medical education. Acad Pediatr. 2016;16(1):20–4.

Wolff M, Stojan J, Cranford J, et al. The impact of informed self-assessment on the development of medical students’ learning goals. Med Teach. 2018;40(3):296–301.

Sawatsky AP, Halvorsen AJ, Daniels PR, et al. Characteristics and quality of rotation-specific resident learning goals: a prospective study. Med Educ Online. 2020;25(1):1714198.

Article   PubMed   PubMed Central   Google Scholar  

Pintrich PR. Chapter 14: The role of goal orientation in self-regulated learning. In: Boekaerts M, Pintrich PR, Zeidner M, editors. Handbook of self-regulation. 1st ed. Academic Press; 2000. p. 451–502.

Kassab SE, El-Sayed W, Hamdy H. Student engagement in undergraduate medical education: a scoping review. Med Educ. 2022;56(7):703–15.

Challis M. AMEE medical education guide No. 19: Personal learning plans. Med Teach. 2000;22(3):225–36.

Knowles MS. Using learning contracts. 1 st ed. San Francisco: Jossey Bass; 1986.

Parsell G, Bligh J. Contract learning, clinical learning and clinicians. Postgrad Med J. 1996;72(847):284–9.

Article   CAS   PubMed   PubMed Central   Google Scholar  

Teunissen PW, Scheele F, Scherpbier AJJA, et al. How residents learn: qualitative evidence for the pivotal role of clinical activities. Med Educ. 2007;41(8):763–70.

Article   CAS   PubMed   Google Scholar  

van Houten-Schat MA, Berkhout JJ, van Dijk N, Endedijk MD, Jaarsma ADC, Diemers AD. Self-regulated learning in the clinical context: a systematic review. Med Educ. 2018;52(10):1008–15.

Taylor DCM, Hamdy H. Adult learning theories: Implications for learning and teaching in medical education: AMEE Guide No. 83. Med Teach. 2013;35(11):e1561–72.

Arksey H, O’Malley L. Scoping studies: towards a methodological framework. Int J Soc Res Methodol. 2005;8(1):19–32.

Peters MDJ, Godfrey C, McInerney P, Munn Z, Tricco AC, Khalol H. Chapter 11: Scoping reviews. In: Aromataris E, Munn Z, eds. JBI Manual for Evidence Synthesis. JBI; 2020. https://synthesismanual.jbi.global. . Accessed 30 Aug 2022.

McGowan J, Sampson M, Salzwedel DM, Cogo E, Foerster V, Lefebvre C. PRESS Peer Review of Electronic Search Strategies: 2015 Guideline Statement. J Clin Epidemiol. 2016;75:40–6.

Hsieh HF, Shannon SE. Three approaches to qualitative content analysis. Qual Health Res. 2005;15(9):1277–88.

Tricco AC, Lillie E, Zarin W, et al. PRISMA extension for scoping reviews (PRISMA-ScR): checklist and explanation. Ann Intern Med. 2018;169(7):467–73.

Venables M, Larocque A, Sikora L, Archibald D, Grudniewicz A. Understanding indigenous health education and exploring indigenous anti-racism approaches in undergraduate medical education: a scoping review protocol. OSF; 2022. https://osf.io/umwgr/ . Accessed 26 Oct 2022.

Download references

Acknowledgements

Not applicable.

This study will be supported through grants from the Department of Medicine at the Ottawa Hospital and the University of Ottawa. The funding bodies had no role in the study design and will not have any role in the collection, analysis and interpretation of data or writing of the manuscript.

Author information

Authors and affiliations.

The Ottawa Hospital – General Campus, 501 Smyth Rd, PO Box 209, Ottawa, ON, K1H 8L6, Canada

Anna Romanova & Claire Touchie

The Ottawa Hospital Research Institute, Ottawa, Canada

Sydney Ruller

The University of Ottawa, Ottawa, Canada

Victoria Cole

The Ottawa Hospital – Riverside Campus, Ottawa, Canada

Susan Humphrey-Murto

You can also search for this author in PubMed   Google Scholar

Contributions

AR designed and drafted the protocol. CT and SH contributed to the refinement of the research question, study methods and editing of the manuscript. VC designed the initial search strategy. All authors reviewed the manuscript for final approval. The review guarantors are CT and SH. The corresponding author is AR.

Authors’ information

AR is a clinician teacher and Assistant Professor with the Division of General Internal Medicine at the University of Ottawa. She is also the Associate Director for the internal medicine clerkship rotation at the General campus of the Ottawa Hospital.

CT is a Professor of Medicine with the Divisions of General Internal Medicine and Infectious Diseases at the University of Ottawa. She is also a member of the UGME Competence Committee at the University of Ottawa and an advisor for the development of a new school of medicine at Toronto Metropolitan University.

SH is an Associate Professor with the Department of Medicine at the University of Ottawa and holds a Tier 2 Research Chair in Medical Education. She is also the Interim Director for the Research Support Unit within the Department of Innovation in Medical Education at the University of Ottawa.

CT and SH have extensive experience with medical education research and have numerous publications in this field.

SR is a Research Assistant with the Division of General Internal Medicine at the Ottawa Hospital Research Institute.

VC is a Health Sciences Research Librarian at the University of Ottawa.

SR and VC have extensive experience in systematic and scoping reviews.

Corresponding author

Correspondence to Anna Romanova .

Ethics declarations

Ethics approval and consent to participate, consent for publication, competing interests.

The authors declare that they have no competing interests.

Additional information

Publisher's note.

Springer Nature remains neutral with regard to jurisdictional claims in published maps and institutional affiliations.

Supplementary Information

Additional file 1. prisma-p 2015 checklist., 13643_2024_2553_moesm2_esm.docx.

Additional file 2: Appendix A. Preliminary search strategy [ 31 ].

Additional file 3: Appendix B. Preliminary data extraction tool.

Rights and permissions.

Open Access This article is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License, which permits use, sharing, adaptation, distribution and reproduction in any medium or format, as long as you give appropriate credit to the original author(s) and the source, provide a link to the Creative Commons licence, and indicate if changes were made. The images or other third party material in this article are included in the article's Creative Commons licence, unless indicated otherwise in a credit line to the material. If material is not included in the article's Creative Commons licence and your intended use is not permitted by statutory regulation or exceeds the permitted use, you will need to obtain permission directly from the copyright holder. To view a copy of this licence, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/ . The Creative Commons Public Domain Dedication waiver ( http://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/ ) applies to the data made available in this article, unless otherwise stated in a credit line to the data.

Reprints and permissions

About this article

Cite this article.

Romanova, A., Touchie, C., Ruller, S. et al. Protocol for a scoping review study on learning plan use in undergraduate medical education. Syst Rev 13 , 131 (2024). https://doi.org/10.1186/s13643-024-02553-w

Download citation

Received : 29 November 2022

Accepted : 03 May 2024

Published : 14 May 2024

DOI : https://doi.org/10.1186/s13643-024-02553-w

Share this article

Anyone you share the following link with will be able to read this content:

Sorry, a shareable link is not currently available for this article.

Provided by the Springer Nature SharedIt content-sharing initiative

Systematic Reviews

ISSN: 2046-4053

• Submission enquiries: Access here and click Contact Us
• General enquiries: [email protected]

• Open access
• Published: 13 May 2024

Sexual and reproductive health implementation research in humanitarian contexts: a scoping review

• Alexandra Norton 1 &
• Hannah Tappis 2  

Reproductive Health volume  21 , Article number:  64 ( 2024 ) Cite this article

85 Accesses

Metrics details

Meeting the health needs of crisis-affected populations is a growing challenge, with 339 million people globally in need of humanitarian assistance in 2023. Given one in four people living in humanitarian contexts are women and girls of reproductive age, sexual and reproductive health care is considered as essential health service and minimum standard for humanitarian response. Despite growing calls for increased investment in implementation research in humanitarian settings, guidance on appropriate methods and analytical frameworks is limited.

A scoping review was conducted to examine the extent to which implementation research frameworks have been used to evaluate sexual and reproductive health interventions in humanitarian settings. Peer-reviewed papers published from 2013 to 2022 were identified through relevant systematic reviews and a literature search of Pubmed, Embase, PsycInfo, CINAHL and Global Health databases. Papers that presented primary quantitative or qualitative data pertaining to a sexual and reproductive health intervention in a humanitarian setting were included.

Seven thousand thirty-six unique records were screened for inclusion, and 69 papers met inclusion criteria. Of these, six papers explicitly described the use of an implementation research framework, three citing use of the Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research. Three additional papers referenced other types of frameworks used in their evaluation. Factors cited across all included studies as helping the intervention in their presence or hindering in their absence were synthesized into the following Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research domains: Characteristics of Systems, Outer Setting, Inner Setting, Characteristics of Individuals, Intervention Characteristics, and Process.

This review found a wide range of methodologies and only six of 69 studies using an implementation research framework, highlighting an opportunity for standardization to better inform the evidence for and delivery of sexual and reproductive health interventions in humanitarian settings. Increased use of implementation research frameworks such as a modified Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research could work toward both expanding the evidence base and increasing standardization.

Plain English summary

Three hundred thirty-nine million people globally were in need of humanitarian assistance in 2023, and meeting the health needs of crisis-affected populations is a growing challenge. One in four people living in humanitarian contexts are women and girls of reproductive age, and provision of sexual and reproductive health care is considered to be essential within a humanitarian response. Implementation research can help to better understand how real-world contexts affect health improvement efforts. Despite growing calls for increased investment in implementation research in humanitarian settings, guidance on how best to do so is limited. This scoping review was conducted to examine the extent to which implementation research frameworks have been used to evaluate sexual and reproductive health interventions in humanitarian settings. Of 69 papers that met inclusion criteria for the review, six of them explicitly described the use of an implementation research framework. Three used the Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research, a theory-based framework that can guide implementation research. Three additional papers referenced other types of frameworks used in their evaluation. This review summarizes how factors relevant to different aspects of implementation within the included papers could have been organized using the Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research. The findings from this review highlight an opportunity for standardization to better inform the evidence for and delivery of sexual and reproductive health interventions in humanitarian settings. Increased use of implementation research frameworks such as a modified Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research could work toward both expanding the evidence base and increasing standardization.

Peer Review reports

Over the past few decades, the field of public health implementation research (IR) has grown as a means by which the real-world conditions affecting health improvement efforts can be better understood. Peters et al. put forward the following broad definition of IR for health: “IR is the scientific inquiry into questions concerning implementation – the act of carrying an intention into effect, which in health research can be policies, programmes, or individual practices (collectively called interventions)” [ 1 ].

As IR emphasizes real-world circumstances, the context within which a health intervention is delivered is a core consideration. However, much IR implemented to date has focused on higher-resource settings, with many proposed frameworks developed with particular utility for a higher-income setting [ 2 ]. In recognition of IR’s potential to increase evidence across a range of settings, there have been numerous reviews of the use of IR in lower-resource settings as well as calls for broader use [ 3 , 4 ]. There have also been more focused efforts to modify various approaches and frameworks to strengthen the relevance of IR to low- and middle-income country settings (LMICs), such as the work by Means et al. to adapt a specific IR framework for increased utility in LMICs [ 2 ].

Within LMIC settings, the centrality of context to a health intervention’s impact is of particular relevance in humanitarian settings, which present a set of distinct implementation challenges [ 5 ]. Humanitarian responses to crisis situations operate with limited resources, under potential security concerns, and often under pressure to relieve acute suffering and need [ 6 ]. Given these factors, successful implementation of a particular health intervention may require different qualities than those that optimize intervention impact under more stable circumstances [ 7 ]. Despite increasing recognition of the need for expanded evidence of health interventions in humanitarian settings, the evidence base remains limited [ 8 ]. Furthermore, despite its potential utility, there is not standardized guidance on IR in humanitarian settings, nor are there widely endorsed recommendations for the frameworks best suited to analyze implementation in these settings.

Sexual and reproductive health (SRH) is a core aspect of the health sector response in humanitarian settings [ 9 ]. Yet, progress in addressing SRH needs has lagged far behind other services because of challenges related to culture and ideology, financing constraints, lack of data and competing priorities [ 10 ]. The Minimum Initial Service Package (MISP) for SRH in Crisis Situations is the international standard for the minimum set of SRH services that should be implemented in all crisis situations [ 11 ]. However, as in other areas of health, there is need for expanded evidence for planning and implementation of SRH interventions in humanitarian settings. Recent systematic reviews of SRH in humanitarian settings have focused on the effectiveness of interventions and service delivery strategies, as well as factors affecting utilization, but have not detailed whether IR frameworks were used [ 12 , 13 , 14 , 15 ]. There have also been recent reviews examining IR frameworks used in various settings and research areas, but none have explicitly focused on humanitarian settings [ 2 , 16 ].

Given the need for an expanded evidence base for SRH interventions in humanitarian settings and the potential for IR to be used to expand the available evidence, a scoping review was undertaken. This scoping review sought to identify IR approaches that have been used in the last ten years to evaluate SRH interventions in humanitarian settings.

This review also sought to shed light on whether there is a need for a common framework to guide research design, analysis, and reporting for SRH interventions in humanitarian settings and if so, if there are any established frameworks already in use that would be fit-for-purpose or could be tailored to meet this need.

The Preferred Reporting Items for Systematic Reviews and Meta-Analyses (PRISMA) extension for scoping reviews was utilized to guide the elements of this review [ 17 ]. The review protocol was retrospectively registered with the Open Science Framework ( https://osf.io/b5qtz ).

Search strategy

A two-fold search strategy was undertaken for this review, which covered the last 10 years (2013–2022). First, recent systematic reviews pertaining to research or evaluation of SRH interventions in humanitarian settings were identified through keyword searches on PubMed and Google Scholar. Four relevant systematic reviews were identified [ 12 , 13 , 14 , 15 ] Table 1 .

Second, a literature search mirroring these reviews was conducted to identify relevant papers published since the completion of searches for the most recent review (April 2017). Additional file 1 includes the search terms that were used in the literature search [see Additional file 1 ].

The literature search was conducted for papers published from April 2017 to December 2022 in the databases that were searched in one or more of the systematic reviews: PubMed, Embase, PsycInfo, CINAHL and Global Health. Searches were completed in January 2023 Table 2 .

Two reviewers screened each identified study for alignment with inclusion criteria. Studies in the four systematic reviews identified were considered potentially eligible if published during the last 10 years. These papers then underwent full-text review to confirm satisfaction of all inclusion criteria, as inclusion criteria were similar but not fully aligned across the four reviews.

Literature search results were exported into a citation manager (Covidence), duplicates were removed, and a step-wise screening process for inclusion was applied. First, all papers underwent title and abstract screening. The remaining papers after abstract screening then underwent full-text review to confirm satisfaction of all inclusion criteria. Title and abstract screening as well as full-text review was conducted independently by both authors; disagreements after full-text review were resolved by consensus.

Data extraction and synthesis

The following content areas were summarized in Microsoft Excel for each paper that met inclusion criteria: publication details including author, year, country, setting [rural, urban, camp, settlement], population [refugees, internally displaced persons, general crisis-affected], crisis type [armed conflict, natural disaster], crisis stage [acute, chronic], study design, research methods, SRH intervention, and intervention target population [specific beneficiaries of the intervention within the broader population]; the use of an IR framework; details regarding the IR framework, how it was used, and any rationale given for the framework used; factors cited as impacting SRH interventions, either positively or negatively; and other key findings deemed relevant to this review.

As the focus of this review was on the approach taken for SRH intervention research and evaluation, the quality of the studies themselves was not assessed.

Twenty papers underwent full-text review due to their inclusion in one or more of the four systematic reviews and meeting publication date inclusion criteria. The literature search identified 7,016 unique papers. After full-text screening, 69 met all inclusion criteria and were included in the review. Figure  1 illustrates the search strategy and screening process.

Flow chart of paper identification

Papers published in each of the 10 years of the review timeframe (2013–2022) were included. 29% of the papers originated from the first five years of the time frame considered for this review, with the remaining 71% papers coming from the second half. Characteristics of included publications, including geographic location, type of humanitarian crisis, and type of SRH intervention, are presented in Table  3 .

A wide range of study designs and methods were used across the papers, with both qualitative and quantitative studies well represented. Twenty-six papers were quantitative evaluations [ 18 , 19 , 20 , 21 , 22 , 23 , 24 , 25 , 26 , 27 , 28 , 29 , 30 , 31 , 32 , 33 , 34 , 35 , 36 , 37 , 38 , 39 , 40 , 41 , 42 , 43 ], 17 were qualitative [ 44 , 45 , 46 , 47 , 48 , 49 , 50 , 51 , 52 , 53 , 54 , 55 , 56 , 57 , 58 , 59 , 60 ], and 26 used mixed methods [ 61 , 62 , 63 , 64 , 65 , 66 , 67 , 68 , 69 , 70 , 71 , 72 , 73 , 74 , 75 , 76 , 77 , 78 , 79 , 80 , 81 , 82 , 83 , 84 , 85 , 86 ]. Within the quantitative evaluations, 15 were observational, while five were quasi-experimental, five were randomized controlled trials, and one was an economic evaluation. Study designs as classified by the authors of this review are summarized in Table  4 .

Six papers (9%) explicitly cited use of an IR framework. Three of these papers utilized the Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research (CFIR) [ 51 , 65 , 70 ]. The CFIR is a commonly used determinant framework that—in its originally proposed form in 2009—is comprised of five domains, each of which has constructs to further categorize factors that impact implementation. The CFIR domains were identified as core content areas influencing the effectiveness of implementation, and the constructs within each domain are intended to provide a range of options for researchers to select from to “guide diagnostic assessments of implementation context, evaluate implementation progress, and help explain findings.” [ 87 ] To allow for consistent terminology throughout this review, the original 2009 CFIR domains and constructs are used.

Guan et al. conducted a mixed methods study to assess the feasibility and effectiveness of a neonatal hepatitis B immunization program in a conflict-affected rural region of Myanmar. Guan et al. report mapping data onto the CFIR as a secondary analysis step. They describe that “CFIR was used as a comprehensive meta-theoretical framework to examine the implementation of the Hepatitis B Virus vaccination program,” and implementation themes from multiple study data sources (interviews, observations, examination of monitoring materials) were mapped onto CFIR constructs. They report their results in two phases – Pre-implementation training and community education, and Implementation – with both anchored in themes that they had mapped onto CFIR domains and constructs. All but six constructs were included in their analysis, with a majority summarized in a table and key themes explored further in the narrative text. They specify that most concerns were identified within the Outer Setting and Process domains, while elements identified within the Inner Setting domain provided strength to the intervention and helped mitigate against barriers [ 70 ].

Sarker et al. conducted a qualitative study to assess provision of maternal, newborn and child health services to Rohingya refugees residing in camps in Cox’s Bazar, Bangladesh. They cite using CFIR as a guide for thematic analysis, applying it after a process of inductive and deductive coding to index these codes into the CFIR domains. They utilized three of the five CFIR domains (Outer Setting, Inner Setting, and Process), stating that the remaining two domains (Intervention Characteristics and Characteristics of Individuals) were not relevant to their analysis. They then proposed two additional CFIR domains, Context and Security, for use in humanitarian contexts. In contrast to Guan et al., CFIR constructs are not used nor mentioned by Sarker et al., with content under each domain instead synthesized as challenges and potential solutions. Regarding the CFIR, Sarker et al. write, “The CFIR guided us for interpretative coding and creating the challenges and possible solutions into groups for further clarification of the issues related to program delivery in a humanitarian crisis setting.” [ 51 ]

Sami et al. conducted a mixed methods case study to assess the implementation of a package of neonatal interventions at health facilities within refugee and internally displaced persons camps in South Sudan. They reference use of the CFIR earlier in the study than Sarker et al., basing their guides for semi-structured focus group discussions on the CFIR framework. They similarly reference a general use of the CFIR framework as they conducted thematic analysis. Constructs are referenced once, but they do not specify whether their application of the CFIR framework included use of domains, constructs, or both. This may be in part because they then applied an additional framework, the World Health Organization (WHO) Health System Framework, to present their findings. They describe a nested approach to their use of these frameworks: “Exploring these [CFIR] constructs within the WHO Health Systems Framework can identify specific entry points to improve the implementation of newborn interventions at critical health system building blocks.” [ 65 ]

Three papers cite use of different IR frameworks. Bolan et al. utilized the Theoretical Domains Framework in their mixed methods feasibility study and pilot cluster randomized trial evaluating pilot use of the Safe Delivery App by maternal and newborn health workers providing basic emergency obstetric and newborn care in facilities in the conflict-affected Maniema province of the Democratic Republic of the Congo (DRC). They used the Theroetical Domains Framework in designing interview questions, and further used it as the coding framework for their analysis. Similar to the CFIR, the Theoretical Domains Framework is a determinant framework that consists of domains, each of which then includes constructs. Bolan et al. utilized the Theoretical Domains Framework at the construct level in interview question development and at the domain level in their analysis, mapping interview responses to eight of the 14 domains [ 83 ]. Berg et al. report using an “exploratory design guided by the principles of an evaluation framework” developed by the Medical Research Council to analyze the implementation process, mechanisms of impact, and outcomes of a three-pillar training intervention to improve maternal and neonatal healthcare in the conflict-affected South Kivu province of the DRC [ 67 , 88 ]. Select components of this evaluation framework were used to guide deductive analysis of focus group discussions and in-depth interviews [ 67 ]. In their study of health workers’ knowledge and attitudes toward newborn health interventions in South Sudan, before and after training and supply provision, Sami et al. report use of the Conceptual Framework of the Role of Attitudes in Evidence-Based Practice Implementation in their analysis process. The framework was used to group codes following initial inductive coding analysis of in-depth interviews [ 72 ].

Three other papers cite use of specific frameworks in their intervention evaluation [ 19 , 44 , 76 ]. As a characteristic of IR is the use of an explicit framework to guide the research, the use of the frameworks in these three papers meets the intention of IR and serves the purpose that an IR framework would have in strengthening the analytical rigor. Castle et al. cite use of their program’s theory of change as a framework for a mixed methods evaluation of the provision of family planning services and more specifically uptake of long-acting reversible contraception use in the DRC. They describe use of the theory of change to “enhance effectiveness of [long-acting reversible contraception] access and uptake.” [ 76 ] Thommesen et al. cite use of the AAAQ (Availability, Accessibility, Acceptability and Quality) framework in their qualitative study assessing midwifery services provided to pregnant women in Afghanistan. This framework is focused on the “underlying elements needed for attainment of optimum standard of health care,” but the authors used it in this paper to evaluate facilitators and barriers to women accessing midwifery services [ 44 ]. Jarrett et al. cite use of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention’s (CDC) Guidelines for Evaluating Public Health Surveillance Systems to explore the characteristics of a population mobility, mortality and birth surveillance system in South Kivu, DRC. Use of these CDC guidelines is cited as one of four study objectives, and commentary is included in the Results section pertaining to each criteria within these guidelines, although more detail regarding use of these guidelines or the authors’ experience with their use in the study is not provided [ 19 ].

Overall, 22 of the 69 papers either explicitly or implicitly identified IR as relevant to their work. Nineteen papers include a focus on feasibility (seven of which did not otherwise identify the importance of exploring questions concerning implementation), touching on a common outcome of interest in implementation research [ 89 ].

While a majority of papers did not explicitly or implicitly use an IR framework to evaluate their SRH intervention of focus, most identified factors that facilitated implementation when they were present or served as a barrier when absent. Sixty cite factors that served as facilitators and 49 cite factors that served as barriers, with just three not citing either. Fifty-nine distinct factors were identified across the papers.

Three of the six studies that explicitly used an IR framework used the CFIR, and the CFIR is the only IR framework that was used by multiple studies. As previously mentioned, Means et al. put forth an adaptation of the CFIR to increase its relevance in LMIC settings, proposing a sixth domain (Characteristics of Systems) and 11 additional constructs [ 2 ]. Using the expanded domains and constructs as proposed by Means et al., the 59 factors cited by papers in this review were thematically grouped into the six domains: Characteristics of Systems, Outer Setting, Inner Setting, Characteristics of Individuals, Intervention Characteristics, and Process. Within each domain, alignment with CFIR constructs was assessed for, and alignment was found with 29 constructs: eight of Means et al.’s 11 constructs, and 21 of the 39 standard CFIR constructs. Three factors did not align with any construct (all fitting within the Outer Setting domain), and 14 aligned with a construct label but not the associated definition. Table 5 synthesizes the mapping of factors affecting SRH intervention implementation to CFIR domains and constructs, with the construct appearing in italics if it is considered to align with that factor by label but not by definition.

Table 6 lists the CFIR constructs that were not found to have alignment with any factor cited by the papers in this review.

This scoping review sought to assess how IR frameworks have been used to bolster the evidence base for SRH interventions in humanitarian settings, and it revealed that IR frameworks, or an explicit IR approach, are rarely used. All four of the systematic reviews identified with a focus on SRH in humanitarian settings articulate the need for more research examining the effectiveness of SRH interventions in humanitarian settings, with two specifically citing a need for implementation research/science [ 12 , 13 ]. The distribution of papers across the timeframe included in this review does suggest that more research on SRH interventions for crisis-affected populations is taking place, as a majority of relevant papers were published in the second half of the review period. The papers included a wide range of methodologies, which reflect the differing research questions and contexts being evaluated. However, it also invites the question of whether there should be more standardization of outcomes measured or frameworks used to guide analysis and to facilitate increased comparison, synthesis and application across settings.

Three of the six papers that used an IR framework utilized the CFIR. Guan et al. used the CFIR at both a domain and construct level, Sarker et al. used the CFIR at the domain level, and Sami et al. did not specify which CFIR elements were used in informing the focus group discussion guide [ 51 , 65 , 70 ]. It is challenging to draw strong conclusions about the applicability of CFIR in humanitarian settings based on the minimal use of CFIR and IR frameworks within the papers reviewed, although Guan et al. provides a helpful model for how analysis can be structured around CFIR domains and constructs. It is worth considering that the minimal use of IR frameworks, and more specifically CFIR constructs, could be in part because that level of prescriptive categorization does not allow for enough fluidity in humanitarian settings. It also raises questions about the appropriate degree of standardization to pursue for research done in these settings.

The mapping of factors affecting SRH intervention implementation provides an example of how a modified CFIR framework could be used for IR in humanitarian contexts. This mapping exercise found factors that mapped to all five of the original CFIR domains as well as the sixth domain proposed by Means et al. All factors fit well within the definition for the selected domain, indicating an appropriate degree of fit between these existing domains and the factors identified as impacting SRH interventions in humanitarian settings. On a construct level, however, the findings were more variable, with one-quarter of factors not fully aligning with any construct. Furthermore, over 40% of the CFIR constructs (including the additional constructs from Means et al.) were not found to align with any factors cited by the papers in this review, also demonstrating some disconnect between the parameters posed by the CFIR constructs and the factors cited as relevant in a humanitarian context.

It is worth noting that while the CFIR as proposed in 2009 was used in this assessment, as well as in the included papers which used the CFIR, an update was published in 2022. Following a review of CFIR use since its publication, the authors provide updates to construct names and definitions to “make the framework more applicable across a range of innovations and settings.” New constructs and subconstructs were also added, for a total of 48 constructs and 19 subconstructs across the five domains [ 90 ]. A CFIR Outcomes Addendum was also published in 2022, based on recommendations for the CFIR to add outcomes and intended to be used as a complement to the CFIR determinants framework [ 91 ]. These expansions to the CFIR framework may improve applicability of the CFIR in humanitarian settings. Several constructs added to the Outer Setting domain could be of particular utility – critical incidents, local attitudes, and local conditions, each of which could help account for unique challenges faced in contexts of crisis. Sub-constructs added within the Inner Setting domain that seek to clarify structural characteristics and available resources would also be of high utility based on mapping of the factors identified in this review to the original CFIR constructs. As outcomes were not formally included in the CFIR until the 2022 addendum, a separate assessment of implementation outcomes was not undertaken in this review. However, analysis of the factors cited by papers in this review as affecting implementation was derived from the full text of the papers and thus captures content relevant to implementation determinants that is contained within the outcomes.

Given the demonstrated need for additional flexibility within an IR framework for humanitarian contexts, while not a focus of this review, it is worth considering whether a different framework could provide a better fit than the CFIR. Other frameworks have differing points of emphasis that would create different opportunities for flexibility but that do not seem to resolve the challenges experienced in applying the CFIR to a humanitarian context. As one example, the EPIS (Exploration, Preparation, Implementation, Sustainment) Framework considers the impact of inner and outer context on each of four implementation phases; while the constructs within this framework are broader than the CFIR, an emphasis on the intervention characteristics is missing, a domain where stronger alignment within the CFIR is also needed [ 92 ]. Alternatively, the PRISM (Practical, Robust Implementation and Sustainability Model) framework is a determinant and evaluation framework that adds consideration of context factors to the RE-AIM (Reach, Effectiveness, Adoption, Implementation, Maintenance) outcomes framework. It has a stronger emphasis on intervention aspects, with sub-domains to account for both organization and patient perspectives within the intervention. While PRISM does include aspects of context, external environment considerations are less robust and intentionally less comprehensive in scope, which would not provide the degree of alignment possible between the Characteristics of Systems and Outer Setting CFIR domains for the considerations unique to humanitarian environments [ 93 ].

Reflecting on their experience with the CFIR, Sarker et al. indicate that it can be a “great asset” in both evaluating current work and developing future interventions. They also encourage future research of humanitarian health interventions to utilize the CFIR [ 51 ]. The other papers that used the CFIR do not specifically reflect on their experience utilizing it, referring more generally to having felt that it was a useful tool [ 65 , 70 ]. On their use of an evaluation framework, Berg et al. reflected that it lent useful structure and helped to identify aspects affecting implementation that otherwise would have gone un-noticed [ 67 ]. The remaining studies that utilized an IR framework did not specifically comment on their experience with its use [ 72 , 83 ]. While a formal IR framework was not engaged by other studies, a number cite a desire for IR to contribute further detail to their findings [ 21 , 37 ].

In their recommendations for strengthening the evidence base for humanitarian health interventions, Ager et al. speak to the need for “methodologic innovation” to develop methodologies with particular applicability in humanitarian settings [ 7 ]. As IR is not yet routinized for SRH interventions, this could be opportune timing for the use of a standardized IR framework to gauge its utility. Using an IR framework to assess factors influencing implementation of the MISP in initial stages of a humanitarian response, and interventions to support more comprehensive SRH service delivery in protracted crises, could lend further rigor and standardization to SRH evaluations, as well as inform strategies to improve MISP implementation over time. Based on categorizing factors identified by these papers as relevant for intervention evaluation, there does seem to be utility to a modified CFIR approach. Given the paucity of formal IR framework use within SRH literature, it would be worth conducting similar scoping exercises to assess for explicit use of IR frameworks within the evidence base for other health service delivery areas in humanitarian settings. In the interim, the recommended approach from this review for future IR on humanitarian health interventions would be a modified CFIR approach with domain-level standardization and flexibility for constructs that may standardize over time with more use. This would enable use of a common analytical framework and vocabulary at the domain level for stakeholders to describe interventions and the factors influencing the effectiveness of implementation, with constructs available to use and customize as most appropriate for specific contexts and interventions.

This review had a number of limitations. As this was a scoping review and a two-part search strategy was used, the papers summarized here may not be comprehensive of those written pertaining to SRH interventions over the past 10 years. Papers from 2013 to 2017 that would have met this scoping review’s inclusion criteria may have been omitted due to being excluded from the systematic reviews. The review was limited to papers available in English. Furthermore, this review did not assess the quality of the papers included or seek to assess the methodology used beyond examination of the use of an IR framework. It does, however, serve as a first step in assessing the extent to which calls for implementation research have been addressed, and identify entry points for strengthening the science and practice of SRH research in humanitarian settings.

With one in 23 people worldwide in need of humanitarian assistance, and financing required for response plans at an all-time high, the need for evidence to guide resource allocation and programming for SRH in humanitarian settings is as important as ever [ 94 ]. Recent research agenda setting initiatives and strategies to advance health in humanitarian settings call for increased investment in implementation research—with priorities ranging from research on effective strategies for expanding access to a full range of contraceptive options to integrating mental health and psychosocial support into SRH programming to capturing accurate and actionable data on maternal and perinatal mortality in a wide range of acute and protracted emergency contexts [ 95 , 96 ]. To truly advance guidance in these areas, implementation research will need to be conducted across diverse humanitarian settings, with clear and consistent documentation of both intervention characteristics and outcomes, as well as contextual and programmatic factors affecting implementation.

Conclusions

Implementation research has potential to increase impact of health interventions particularly in crisis-affected settings where flexibility, adaptability and context-responsive approaches are highlighted as cornerstones of effective programming. There remains significant opportunity for standardization of research in the humanitarian space, with one such opportunity occurring through increased utilization of IR frameworks such as a modified CFIR approach. Investing in more robust sexual and reproductive health research in humanitarian contexts can enrich insights available to guide programming and increase transferability of learning across settings.

Availability of data and materials

The datasets analyzed during the current study are available from the corresponding author on reasonable request.

Abbreviations

Availability, Accessibility, Acceptability and Quality

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention

Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research

Democratic Republic of the Congo

Exploration, Preparation, Implementation, Sustainment

• Implementation research

Low and middle income country

Minimum Initial Service Package

Practical, Robust Implementation and Sustainability Model

Preferred Reporting Items for Systematic Reviews and Meta-Analyses

Reach, Effectiveness, Adoption, Implementation, Maintenance

• Sexual and reproductive health

World Health Organization

Peters DH, et al. Implementation research: what it is and how to do it. RESEARCH METHODS. 2013;347:7.

Means AR, et al. Evaluating and optimizing the consolidated framework for implementation research (CFIR) for use in low- and middle-income countries: a systematic review. Implement Sci. 2020;15(1):17.

Article   PubMed   PubMed Central   Google Scholar  

Alonge O, et al. How is implementation research applied to advance health in low-income and middle-income countries? BMJ Glob Health. 2019;4(2):e001257.

Ridde V, Pérez D, Robert E. Using implementation science theories and frameworks in global health. BMJ Glob Health. 2020;5(4):e002269.

Gaffey MF, et al. Delivering health and nutrition interventions for women and children in different conflict contexts: a framework for decision making on what, when, and how. Lancet (London, England). 2021;397(10273):543–54.

Article   PubMed   Google Scholar  

Singh NS, et al. Delivering health interventions to women, children, and adolescents in conflict settings: what have we learned from ten country case studies? The Lancet. 2021;397(10273):533–42.

Article   Google Scholar  

Ager A, et al. Strengthening the evidence base for health programming in humanitarian crises. Science. 2014;345(6202):1290–2.

Article   CAS   PubMed   Google Scholar  

Blanchet K, et al. Evidence on public health interventions in humanitarian crises. The Lancet. 2017;390(10109):2287–96.

Sphere A. The Sphere Handbook | Standards for quality humanitarian response. 2018.

Google Scholar  

Barot S. In a State of Crisis: Meeting the Sexual and Reproductive Health Needs of Women in Humanitarian Situations. Guttmacher Policy Rev. 2017;20:7.

Crisis, I.-A.W.G.f.R.H.i., Minimum Initial Service Package. 2020: https://www.unfpa.org/resources/minimum-initial-service-package-misp-srh-crisis-situations .

Casey SE. Evaluations of reproductive health programs in humanitarian settings: a systematic review. Confl Heal. 2015;9(1):S1.

Singh NS, et al. A long way to go: a systematic review to assess the utilisation of sexual and reproductive health services during humanitarian crises. BMJ Glob Health. 2018;3(2):e000682.

Singh NS, et al. Evaluating the effectiveness of sexual and reproductive health services during humanitarian crises: A systematic review. PLoS ONE. 2018;13(7):e0199300.

Warren E, et al. Systematic review of the evidence on the effectiveness of sexual and reproductive health interventions in humanitarian crises. BMJ Open. 2015;5(12):e008226.

Dadich A, Piper A, Coates D. Implementation science in maternity care: a scoping review. Implement Sci. 2021;16(1):16.

Tricco AC, et al. PRISMA Extension for Scoping Reviews (PRISMA-ScR): Checklist and Explanation. Ann Intern Med. 2018;169(7):467–73.

Devine A, et al. Strategies for the prevention of perinatal hepatitis B transmission in a marginalized population on the Thailand-Myanmar border: a cost-effectiveness analysis. BMC Infect Dis. 2017;17(1):552.

Jarrett P, et al. Evaluation of a population mobility, mortality, and birth surveillance system in South Kivu. Democratic Republic of the Congo Disasters. 2020;44(2):390–407.

PubMed   Google Scholar  

Logie CH, et al. A Psycho-Educational HIV/STI Prevention Intervention for Internally Displaced Women in Leogane, Haiti: Results from a Non-Randomized Cohort Pilot Study. PLoS ONE. 2014;9(2):e89836.

O’Laughlin KN, et al. A cohort study to assess a communication intervention to improve linkage to HIV care in Nakivale Refugee Settlement. Uganda Glob Public Health. 2021;16(12):1848–55.

Adam I. The influence of maternal health education on the place of delivery in conflict settings of Darfur. Sudan Conflict and Health. 2015;9:31.

Adam IF, et al. Relationship between implementing interpersonal communication and mass education campaigns in emergency settings and use of reproductive healthcare services: evidence from Darfur, Sudan. BMJ Open. 2015;5(9):e008285.

Edmond K, et al. Mobile outreach health services for mothers and children in conflict-affected and remote areas: a population-based study from Afghanistan. Arch Dis Child. 2020;105(1):18–25.

Nasir S, et al. Dissemination and implementation of the e-MCHHandbook, UNRWA’s newly released maternal and child health mobile application: a cross-sectional study. BMJ Open. 2020;10(3):e034885.

O’Laughlin KN, et al. Feasibility and acceptability of home-based HIV testing among refugees: a pilot study in Nakivale refugee settlement in southwestern Uganda. BMC Infect Dis. 2018;18(1):332.

Adam I. Evidence from cluster surveys on the association between home-based counseling and use of family planning in conflict-affected Darfur. Int J Gynecol Obstet. 2016;133(2):221–5.

Casey S, et al. Availability of long-acting and permanent family-planning methods leads to increase in use in conflict-affected northern Uganda: Evidence from cross-sectional baseline and endline cluster surveys. Glob Public Health. 2013;8(3):284–97.

Corna F, et al. Supporting maternal mental health of Rohingya refugee women during the perinatal period to promote child health and wellbeing: a field study in Cox’s Bazar. Intervention, the Journal of Mental Health & Psychosocial Support in Conflict Affected Areas. 2019;17(2):160–8.

Glass N, et al. Effectiveness of the Communities Care programme on change in social norms associated with gender-based violence (GBV) with residents in intervention compared with control districts in Mogadishu, Somalia. BMJ Open. 2019;9(3):e023819.

James LE, et al. Development and Testing of a Community-Based Intervention to Address Intimate Partner Violence among Rohingya and Syrian Refugees: A Social Norms-Based Mental Health-Integrated Approach. Int J Environ Res Public Health. 2021;18(21):11674.

Le Roux E, et al. Engaging with faith groups to prevent VAWG in conflict-affected communities: results from two community surveys in the DRC. BMC Int Health Hum Rights. 2020;20(1):27.

Morris CN, et al. When political solutions for acute conflict in Yemen seem distant, demand for reproductive health services is immediate: a programme model for resilient family planning and post-abortion care services. Sex Reprod Health Matters. 2019;27(2):1610279.

Anibueze AU, et al. Impact of counseling visual multimedia on use of family planning methods among displaced Nigerian families. Health Promot Int. 2022;37(3):daac060.

Doocy S, et al. Cash-based assistance and the nutrition status of pregnant and lactating women in the Somalia food crisis: A comparison of two transfer modalities. PLoS ONE. 2020;15(4):e0230989.

Article   CAS   PubMed   PubMed Central   Google Scholar  

Draiko CV, et al. The effect of umbilical cord cleansing with chlorhexidine gel on neonatal mortality among the community births in South Sudan: a quasi-experimental study. Pan Afr Med J. 2021;38:78.

Edmond KM, et al. Can community health worker home visiting improve care-seeking and maternal and newborn care practices in fragile states such as Afghanistan? A population-based intervention study. BMC Med. 2018;16(1):106.

Edmond KM, et al. Conditional cash transfers to improve use of health facilities by mothers and newborns in conflict affected countries, a prospective population based intervention study from Afghanistan. BMC Pregnancy Childbirth. 2019;19(1):193.

Bakesiima R, et al. Effect of peer counselling on acceptance of modern contraceptives among female refugee adolescents in northern Uganda: A randomised controlled trial. PLoS ONE. 2021;16(9):e0256479.

Greene MC, et al. Evaluation of an integrated intervention to reduce psychological distress and intimate partner violence in refugees: Results from the Nguvu cluster randomized feasibility trial. PLoS ONE. 2021;16(6):e0252982.

Gupta J, et al. Gender norms and economic empowerment intervention to reduce intimate partner violence against women in rural Côte d’Ivoire: a randomized controlled pilot study. BMC Int Health Hum Rights. 2013;13(1):46.

Hossain M, et al. Working with men to prevent intimate partner violence in a conflict-affected setting: a pilot cluster randomized controlled trial in rural Côte d’Ivoire. BMC Public Health. 2014;14(1):339.

Vaillant J, et al. Engaging men to transform inequitable gender attitudes and prevent intimate partner violence: a cluster randomised controlled trial in North and South Kivu, Democratic Republic of Congo. BMJ Glob Health. 2020;5(5):e002223.

Thommesen T, et al. “The midwife helped me … otherwise I could have died”: women’s experience of professional midwifery services in rural Afghanistan - a qualitative study in the provinces Kunar and Laghman. BMC Pregnancy Childbirth. 2020;20(1):140.

Awasom-Fru A, et al. Doctors’ experiences providing sexual and reproductive health care at Catholic Hospitals in the conflict-affected North-West region of Cameroon: a qualitative study. Reprod Health. 2022;19(1):126.

Kabakian-Khasholian T, Makhoul J, Ghusayni A. “A person who does not have money does not enter”: a qualitative study on refugee women’s experiences of respectful maternity care. BMC Pregnancy and Childbirth. 2022;22(1):748.

Lilleston P, et al. Evaluation of a mobile approach to gender-based violence service delivery among Syrian refugees in Lebanon. Health Policy Plan. 2018;33(7):767–76.

Mugo NS, et al. Barriers Faced by the Health Workers to Deliver Maternal Care Services and Their Perceptions of the Factors Preventing Their Clients from Receiving the Services: A Qualitative Study in South Sudan. Matern Child Health J. 2018;22(11):1598–606.

Persson M, et al. A qualitative study on health care providers’ experiences of providing comprehensive abortion care in Cox’s Bazar, Bangladesh. Conflict and Health. 2021;15(1):6.

Phanwichatkul T, et al. The perceptions and practices of Thai health professionals providing maternity care for migrant Burmese women: An ethnographic study. Women Birth. 2022;35(4):e356–68.

Sarker M, et al. Effective maternal, newborn and child health programming among Rohingya refugees in Cox’s Bazar, Bangladesh: Implementation challenges and potential solutions. PLoS ONE. 2020;15(3):e0230732.

Tousaw E, et al. “Without this program, women can lose their lives”: migrant women’s experiences with the Safe Abortion Referral Programme in Chiang Mai. Thailand Reprod Health Matters. 2017;25(51):58–68.

Tousaw E, et al. “It is just like having a period with back pain”: exploring women’s experiences with community-based distribution of misoprostol for early abortion on the Thailand-Burma border. Contraception. 2018;97(2):122–9.

West L, et al. Factors in use of family planning services by Syrian women in a refugee camp in Jordan. Journal of Family Planning and Reproductive Health Care. 2017;43(2):96–102.

O’Connell KA, et al. Meeting the Sexual and Reproductive Health Needs of Internally Displaced Persons in Ethiopia’s Somali Region: A Qualitative Process Evaluation. Glob Health Sci Pract. 2022;10(5):e2100818.

Orya E, et al. Strengthening close to community provision of maternal health services in fragile settings: an exploration of the changing roles of TBAs in Sierra Leone and Somaliland. BMC Health Serv Res. 2017;17(1):460.

Perera SM, et al. Barriers to seeking post-abortion care in Paktika Province, Afghanistan: a qualitative study of clients and community members. BMC Womens Health. 2021;21(1):390.

Tanabe M, et al. Piloting community-based medical care for survivors of sexual assault in conflict-affected Karen State of eastern Burma. Confl Heal. 2013;7(1):12.

Tran NT, et al. Clinical outreach refresher trainings in crisis settings (S-CORT): clinical management of sexual violence survivors and manual vacuum aspiration in Burkina Faso, Nepal, and South Sudan. Reprod Health Matters. 2017;25(51):103–13.

Yankah E, et al. Feasibility and acceptability of mobile phone platforms to deliver interventions to address gender-based violence among Syrian adolescent girls and young women in Izmir. Turkey Vulnerable Children and Youth Studies. 2020;15(2):133–43.

Muuo S, et al. Barriers and facilitators to care-seeking among survivors of gender-based violence in the Dadaab refugee complex. Sex Reprod Health Matters. 2020;28(1):1722404.

Amsalu R, et al. Essential newborn care practice at four primary health facilities in conflict affected areas of Bossaso, Somalia: a cross-sectional study. Conflict and Health. 2019;13(13):27.

Myers A, et al. Facilitators and barriers in implementing the Minimum Initial Services Package (MISP) for reproductive health in Nepal post-earthquake. Conflict and Health. 2018;12:35.

Santo L.C.d, et al. Feasibility and acceptability of a video library tool to support community health worker counseling in rural Afghan districts: a cross-sectional assessment. Conflict and Health. 2020;14:56.

Sami S, et al. Understanding health systems to improve community and facility level newborn care among displaced populations in South Sudan: a mixed methods case study. BMC Pregnancy Childbirth. 2018;18(1):325.

Amsalu R, et al. Effectiveness of clinical training on improving essential newborn care practices in Bossaso, Somalia: a pre and postintervention study. BMC Pediatr. 2020;20(1):215.

Berg M, Mwambali SN, Bogren M. Implementation of a three-pillar training intervention to improve maternal and neonatal healthcare in the Democratic Republic Of Congo: a process evaluation study in an urban health zone. Glob Health Action. 2022;15(1):2019391.

Castillo M, et al. Turning Disaster into an Opportunity for Quality Improvement in Essential Intrapartum and Newborn Care Services in the Philippines: Pre- to Posttraining Assessments. Biomed Res Int. 2016;2016:1–9.

Foster AM, Arnott G, Hobstetter M. Community-based distribution of misoprostol for early abortion: evaluation of a program along the Thailand-Burma border. Contraception. 2017;96(4):242–7.

Guan TH, et al. Implementation of a neonatal hepatitis B immunization program in rural Karenni State, Myanmar: A mixed-methods study. PLoS ONE. 2021;16(12):e0261470.

Logie, C.H., et al., Mixed-methods findings from the Ngutulu Kagwero (agents of change) participatory comic pilot study on post-rape clinical care and sexual violence prevention with refugee youth in a humanitarian setting in Uganda. Global Public Health, 2022((Logie C.H., [email protected]) Factor-Inwentash Faculty of Social Work, University of Toronto, Toronto, Canada(Logie C.H., [email protected]) Women’s College Research Institute, Women’s College Hospital, Toronto, Canada(Logie C.H., carmen.l).

Sami S, et al. “You have to take action”: changing knowledge and attitudes towards newborn care practices during crisis in South Sudan. Reprod Health Matters. 2017;25(51):124–39.

Smith JR, et al. Clinical care for sexual assault survivors multimedia training: a mixed-methods study of effect on healthcare providers’ attitudes, knowledge, confidence, and practice in humanitarian settings. Confl Heal. 2013;7(1):14.

Stevens A, et al. Folate supplementation to prevent birth abnormalities: evaluating a community-based participatory action plan for refugees and migrant workers on the Thailand-Myanmar border. Public Health. 2018;161:83–9.

Nguyen Toan T, et al. Strengthening healthcare providers’ capacity for safe abortion and postabortion care services in humanitarian settings: lessons learned from the clinical outreach refresher training model (S-CORT) in Uganda, Nigeria, and the Democratic Republic of Congo. Conflict and Health. 2021;15(1):20.

Castle S, et al. Successful programmatic approaches to facilitating IUD uptake: CARE’s experience in DRC. BMC Womens Health. 2019;19(1):104.

Deitch J, et al. “They Love Their Patients”: Client Perceptions of Quality of Postabortion Care in North and South Kivu, the Democratic Republic of the Congo. Global health, science and practice. 2019;7(Suppl 2):S285–98.

Ferreyra C, et al. Evaluation of a community-based HIV test and start program in a conflict affected rural area of Yambio County, South Sudan. PLoS ONE. 2021;16(7):e0254331.

Ho LS, Wheeler E. Using Program Data to Improve Access to Family Planning and Enhance the Method Mix in Conflict-Affected Areas of the Democratic Republic of the Congo. Glob Health Sci Pract. 2018;6(1):161–77.

Klabbers RE, et al. Health Worker Perspectives on Barriers and Facilitators of Assisted Partner Notification for HIV for Refugees and Ugandan Nationals: A Mixed Methods Study in West Nile Uganda. AIDS Behav. 2021;25(10):3206–22.

Turner C, et al. Neonatal Intensive Care in a Karen Refugee Camp: A 4 Year Descriptive Study. PLoS ONE. 2013;8(8):e72721.

Vries Id, et al. Key lessons from a mixed-method evaluation of a postnatal home visit programme in the humanitarian setting of Gaza. Eastern Mediterr Health J. 2021;27(6):546–52.

Bolan NE, et al. mLearning in the Democratic Republic of the Congo: A Mixed-Methods Feasibility and Pilot Cluster Randomized Trial Using the Safe Delivery App. Global health, science and practice. 2018;6(4):693–710.

Khan MN, et al. Evaluating feasibility and acceptability of a local psycho-educational intervention for pregnant women with common mental problems affected by armed conflict in Swat, Pakistan: A parallel randomized controlled feasibility trial. Int J Soc Psychiatry. 2017;63(8):724–35.

Hynes M, et al. Using a quality improvement approach to improve maternal and neonatal care in North Kivu, Democratic Republic of Congo. Reprod Health Matters. 2017;25(51):140–50.

Gibbs A, et al. The impacts of combined social and economic empowerment training on intimate partner violence, depression, gender norms and livelihoods among women: an individually randomised controlled trial and qualitative study in Afghanistan. BMJ Glob Health. 2020;5(3):e001946.

Damschroder L, et al. Fostering implementation of health services research findings into practice: a consolidated framework for advancing implementation science. Implementation science: IS; 2009.

Moore GF, et al. Process evaluation of complex interventions: Medical Research Council guidance. BMJ. 2015;350:h1258.

Proctor E, et al. Outcomes for Implementation Research: Conceptual Distinctions, Measurement Challenges, and Research Agenda. Adm Policy Ment Health. 2011;38(2):65–76.

Damschroder LJ, et al. The updated Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research based on user feedback. Implement Sci. 2022;17(1):75.

Damschroder LJ, et al. Conceptualizing outcomes for use with the Consolidated Framework for Implementation Research (CFIR): the CFIR Outcomes Addendum. Implement Sci. 2022;17(1):7.

Aarons GA, Hurlburt M, Horwitz SM. Advancing a Conceptual Model of Evidence-Based Practice Implementation in Public Service Sectors. Administration and Policy in Mental Health and Mental Health Services Research. 2011;38(1):4–23.

Feldstein AC, Glasgow RE. A Practical, Robust Implementation and Sustainability Model (PRISM) for Integrating Research Findings into Practice. The Joint Commission Journal on Quality and Patient Safety. 2008;34(4):228–43.

OCHA. Global Humanitarian Overview 2023. 2022 [cited 2023 8/3/2023]; Available from: https://humanitarianaction.info/node/13073/article/glance-0 . Accessed 8 Mar 2023.

Kobeissi L, et al. Setting research priorities for sexual, reproductive, maternal, newborn, child and adolescent health in humanitarian settings. Confl Heal. 2021;15(1):16.

Save the, C., et al. Roadmap to Accelerate Progress for Every Newborn in Humanitarian Settings 2020 – 2024. 2020. p. 52.

Inter-Agency Working Group on Reproductive Health in, C. Inter-Agency Field Manual on Reproductive Health in Humanitarian Settings. 2018.

Download references

Acknowledgements

Not applicable.

The authors received no funding for this study.

Author information

Authors and affiliations.

Duke University School of Medicine, 40 Duke Medicine Circle, Durham, NC, 27710, USA

Alexandra Norton

Johns Hopkins Bloomberg School of Public Health, 615 N. Wolfe St, Baltimore, MD, 21205, USA

Hannah Tappis

You can also search for this author in PubMed   Google Scholar

Contributions

AN and HT designed the scoping review. AN conducted the literature search. AN and HT screened records for inclusion. AN extracted data from included studies. Both authors contributed to synthesis of results. AN drafted the manuscript and both authors contributed to editorial changes.

Corresponding author

Correspondence to Alexandra Norton .

Ethics declarations

Ethics approval and consent to participate, consent for publication, competing interests.

The authors declare no competing interests.

Additional information

Publisher’s note.

Springer Nature remains neutral with regard to jurisdictional claims in published maps and institutional affiliations.

Supplementary Information

Additional file 1.

. Literature search terms: Exact search terms used in literature search, with additional detail on the methodology to determine search terms and definitions used for each component of the search

Rights and permissions

Open Access This article is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License, which permits use, sharing, adaptation, distribution and reproduction in any medium or format, as long as you give appropriate credit to the original author(s) and the source, provide a link to the Creative Commons licence, and indicate if changes were made. The images or other third party material in this article are included in the article's Creative Commons licence, unless indicated otherwise in a credit line to the material. If material is not included in the article's Creative Commons licence and your intended use is not permitted by statutory regulation or exceeds the permitted use, you will need to obtain permission directly from the copyright holder. To view a copy of this licence, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/ . The Creative Commons Public Domain Dedication waiver ( http://creativecommons.org/publicdomain/zero/1.0/ ) applies to the data made available in this article, unless otherwise stated in a credit line to the data.

Reprints and permissions

About this article

Cite this article.

Norton, A., Tappis, H. Sexual and reproductive health implementation research in humanitarian contexts: a scoping review. Reprod Health 21 , 64 (2024). https://doi.org/10.1186/s12978-024-01793-2

Download citation

Received : 06 November 2023

Accepted : 12 April 2024

Published : 13 May 2024

DOI : https://doi.org/10.1186/s12978-024-01793-2

Share this article

Anyone you share the following link with will be able to read this content:

Sorry, a shareable link is not currently available for this article.

Provided by the Springer Nature SharedIt content-sharing initiative

• Humanitarian settings

Reproductive Health

ISSN: 1742-4755

• General enquiries: [email protected]